OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
OOppeerraattiioonn
MMaaiinntteennaannccee
S
Sppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publica-
tion. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time
so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive
(RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD
models are opposite of those written in this manual.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in vio-
lation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government
agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic components. It is possible for an improperly
installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems.
For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions
or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you
choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situ-
ation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in vehicle damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F4
FOREWORD
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI.We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis-
tinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS.We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construction
of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-
trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.HYUNDAI deal-
ers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you
can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with important
operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Copyright 2016 HYUNDAI Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor Company.
Severe vehicle damage may result from the use of poor quality lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI spec-
ifications.You must always use high quality lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the
Vehicle Specifications chapter of the Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight
chapters plus an index. Each chapter
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner's
Manual provides you with many safe-
ty precautions and operating proce-
dures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert sym-
bol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury haz-
ards. Obey all safety mes-
sages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert sym-
bol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL
S
SAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS
F5
Introduction
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
F6
Introduction
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and vehicle regula-
tions.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
HYUNDAI promotes an environmen-
tally sound treatment for end of life
vehicles and offers to take back your
HYUNDAI end of life vehicles in
accordance with the European Union
(EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.
You can get detailed information
from your national HYUNDAI home-
page.
NOTICE
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMOODDIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS
R
REETTUURRNNIINNGG UUSSEEDD VVEEHHIICCLLEESS
((FFOORR EEUURROOPPEE))
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Convenient features of your vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2
Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3
Interior overview....................................................1-4
Instrument panel overview...................................1-6
Engine compartment .............................................1-8
1-2
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood ..................................................3-36
2. Headlamp ..........................................7-67
3. Daytime running light (DRL) ....3-95, 7-75
4. Tires and wheels ........................7-41, 8-4
5. Outside rearview mirror .....................3-24
6. Sunroof ..............................................3-33
7. Front windshield wiper blades ...........7-34
8. Windows ............................................3-27
9. Parking assist system..................... 3-108
OAE016001
■ Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Antenna ................................................4-3
2. Doors ..................................................3-12
3. Fuel filler door.....................................3-39
4. Parking assist system/......................3-108
Rear parking assist system ..............3-105
5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-76
6. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-81
7. Rearview camera .............................3-104
8. Tailgate ...............................................3-38
9. Towing hook.......................................6-33
OAE016002
■ Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
I
INNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-14
2. Driver position memory system ........3-18
3. Outside rearview mirror folding
switch ................................................3-26
4. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ................................................3-25
5. Central door lock switch ....................3-14
6. Power window switches ....................3-27
7. Power window lock switch ................3-31
8. Headlight leveling device ..................3-96
9. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ......................................3-43
10. Blind spot detection system button ..5-38
11. Lane keeping assist system ..............5-59
12. ESC OFF button..............................5-31
13. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-39
14. Hood release lever ........................3-36
15. Fuse box..........................................7-53
16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever......3-21
17. Steering wheel ................................3-20
18. Seat ..................................................2-4
OAE016003L
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Left-hand drive
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-14
2. Driver position memory system ........3-18
3. Outside rearview mirror folding
switch ................................................3-26
4. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ................................................3-25
5. Central door lock switch ....................3-14
6. Power window switches ....................3-28
7. Power window lock switch ................3-31
8. Headlight leveling device ..................3-96
9. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ......................................3-43
10. Blind spot detection system button ..5-38
11. Lane keeping assist system ..............5-59
12. ESC OFF button..............................5-31
13. Fuel filler door opener ....................3-39
14. Hood release lever ..........................3-36
15. Fuse box..........................................7-53
16. Steering wheel ................................3-20
17. Seat ..................................................2-5
OAE016003R
■ Right-hand drive
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-6
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
Your vehicle at a glance
OAE016004
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Left-hand drive
1. Instrument cluster ....................................3-42
2. Horn .........................................................3-22
3. Driver's front air bag ................................2-54
4. Key ignition switch/ ....................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button ...........................5-9
5. Light control/Turn signals.........................3-91
6. Wiper/Washer ........................................3-101
7. Audio system/ ............................................4-9
Navigation system ....................................4-5
8. Hazard warning flasher..............................6-2
9. Automatic climate control system ............3-112
10. Dual clutch transmission........................5-15
11. Passenger's front air bag.......................2-54
12. Glove box.............................................3-130
13. Power outlet .........................................3-134
14. Cigarette lighter ...................................3-137
15. AUX, USB and iPod
®
port........................4-2
16. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat............2-21
17. Heated steering wheel...........................3-21
18. Parking assist system ON button/........3-108
Rear paring assist system OFF button..3-106
19. Cup holder ...........................................3-132
20. Steering wheel audio controls/ ................4-4
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls ..................................4-5
21. Speed limiter/........................................ 5-67
Cruise controls/......................................5-69
Smart cruise controls.............................5-75
1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
1
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
OAE016004R
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Right-hand drive
1. Instrument cluster ....................................3-42
2. Horn .........................................................3-22
3. Driver's front air bag ................................2-54
4. Key ignition switch/ ....................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button ...........................5-9
5. Light control/Turn signals.........................3-91
6. Wiper/Washer ........................................3-101
7. Audio system/ ............................................4-9
Navigation system ....................................4-5
8. Hazard warning flasher..............................6-2
9. Automatic climate control system ............3-112
10. Dual clutch transmission........................5-15
11. Passenger's front air bag.......................2-54
12. Glove box.............................................3-130
13. Power outlet .........................................3-134
14. Cigarette lighter ...................................3-137
15. AUX, USB and iPod
®
port........................4-2
16. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat............2-21
17. Heated steering wheel...........................3-21
18. Parking assist system ON button/........3-108
Rear paring assist system OFF button..3-106
19. Cup holder ...........................................3-132
20. Steering wheel audio controls/ ................4-4
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls ..................................4-5
21. Speed limiter/........................................ 5-67
Cruise controls/......................................5-69
Smart cruise controls.............................5-75
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1-8
Your vehicle at a glance
OAE076001
■■
Gasoline Engine (Kappa 1.6 GDI)
1. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-23
2. Engine oil dipstick ............................7-22
3. Engine coolant cap ..........................7-24
4. Engine coolant reservoir ..................7-24
5. Inverter coolant reservoir ................7-24
6. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-28
7. Air cleaner ........................................7-30
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ....7-29
9. Fuse box ..........................................7-54
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) system ....................2
IONIQ HEV energy flow.............................................3
Energy flow ...........................................................................3
Driving the hybrid vehicle .......................................7
Starting the vehicle...............................................................7
Special features of hybrid vehicle ....................................8
Safety precautions for hybrid system .................10
Hybrid vehicle components safety precautions.........10
Safety Plug............................................................................13
Hybrid battery air intake ..................................................13
If an accident occurs..........................................................14
When the hybrid vehicle shuts off .................................15
HHyybbrriidd ssyysstteemm oovveerrvviieeww
H2
HHEEVV ((HHYYBBRRIIDD EELLEECCTTRRIICC VVEEHHIICCLLEE)) SSYYSSTTEEMM
The HYUNDAI Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) uses both the gasoline engine and the electric motor for power. The elec-
tric motor is run by a 270V high-voltage HEV battery.
Depending on the driving conditions, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor
or even both at the same time.
Fuel efficiency increases when the engine is at idle, or when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor with the HEV bat-
tery.
The HEV battery charge must be maintained, so at times the engine will come on even at idle to act as a generator.
Charging also occurs when decelerating or by regenerative braking.
OAE056066
Startup/Low speed cruise
Electric motor
Acceleration
Electric motor + Engine
High speed cruise
Engine
Deceleration
Charging
Stop
Engine OFF
H3
Energy flow
The hybrid system informs the driv-
ers its energy flow in various operat-
ing modes. While driving, the current
energy flow is specified in 11 modes.
Vehicle Stop
The vehicle is stopped.
(No energy flow)
EV Propulsion
Only the motor power is used to drive
the vehicle.
(Battery ➞ Wheel)
IIOONNIIQQ HHEEVV EENNEERRGGYY FFLLOOWW
OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046150L/OAEQ046020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
H4
Power Assist
Both the motor and the engine power
are used to drive the vehicle.
(Battery & Engine ➞ Wheel)
Engine Only Propulsion
Only the engine power is used to
drive the vehicle.
(Engine ➞ Wheel)
Engine Generation
When the vehicle is stopped, the
high-voltage battery is charged up by
the engine.
(Engine ➞ Battery)
IIOONNIIQQ HHEEVV EENNEERRGGYY FFLLOOWW ((CCOONNTT..))
OAE046151L/OAEQ046021L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046152L/OAEQ046022L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046153L/OAEQ046005L
■ Type A
■ Type B
H5
Regeneration
The high-voltage battery is charged
up by the regenerative brake system.
(Wheel ➞ Battery)
Engine Brake
The engine braking is used to decel-
erate the vehicle.
(Wheel ➞ Engine)
Power Reserve
The engine is simultaneously used to
drive the vehicle and to charge up
the high-voltage battery.
(Engine ➞ Wheel & Battery)
OAE046152L/OAEQ046004L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046154L/OAEQ046023L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046150L/OAEQ046002L
■ Type A
■ Type B
H6
Engine Generation/Motor Drive
The engine charges up the high-volt-
age battery. The motor power is used
to drive the vehicle.
(Engine ➞ Battery ➞ Wheel)
Engine Generation/Regeneration
The engine and regenerative brake
system charges up the high-voltage
battery.
(Engine & Wheel ➞ Battery)
Engine Brake/Regeneration
The engine braking is simultaneously
used to decelerate the vehicle and to
charge up the high-voltage battery.
(Wheel ➞ Engine & Battery)
IIOONNIIQQ HHEEVV EENNEERRGGYY FFLLOOWW ((CCOONNTT..))
OAE046155L/OAEQ046024L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046155L/OAEQ046007L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046151L/OAEQ046003L
■ Type A
■ Type B
H7
Starting the vehicle
Vehicles with remote key system
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3.Depress the brake pedal.
4.Turn the ignition swich to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 senconds) nutil
the " " comes on and release it.
Whether the engine is cold or
warm, it should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
After following the start proce-
dures, “ ” indicator on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
For more information, please check
Chapter 5.
Vehicles with smart key system
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
3.Place the shift lever in P (Park)
with the shift lever in N (Neutral),
you cannot start the vehicle.
4.Depress the brake pedal.
5.Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton. If the hybrid system starts, the
" " indicator will come on.
Whether the engine is cold or
warm, it should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
After following the start proce-
dures, “ ” indicator on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
For more information, please check
Chapter 5.
ECONOMICAL and SAFE OPERA-
TION of Hybrid system
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Do not
make "jack-rabbit" starts. Do not
race between stoplights.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear out.
• The regenerative brake generates
energy when the vehicle deceler-
ates.
• When the hybrid battery power is
low, the hybrid system automatical-
ly recharges the hybrid battery.
• When the engine run with the shift
lever in N (Neutral), the hybrid sys-
tem cannot generate electricity. The
hybrid battery cannot recharge with
the shift lever in N (Neutral).
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE
H8
Information
In the hybrid system, the engine auto-
matically runs and stops. When the
hybrid system operates, the " "
indicator is illuminated.
In the following situation, the engine
may operate automatically.
- When the engine is ready to run
- When the hybrid battery is being
charged
- Depending on the temperature con-
dition of the hybrid battery
Special features of hybrid
vehicle
Hybrid vehicles sound different than
gasoline engine vehicles. When the
hybrid system operates, you may
hear a sound from the hybrid battery
system behind the rear seat. If you
apply the accelerator pedal rapidly,
you may hear an unconventional
sound. When you apply the brake
pedal, you may hear a sound from
the regenerative brake system.
When the hybrid system is turned off
or on, you may hear a sound in the
engine compartment. If you depress
the brake pedal repeatedly when the
hybrid system is turned on, you may
hear a sound in the engine compart-
ment. None of these sounds indicate
a problem. These are normal charac-
teristics of hybrid vehicles.
If any of following occur, it's a normal
condition if you hear a motor sound
in the engine compartment:
- After turning off the hybrid system,
the brake pedal is released.
- When the hybrid system is turned
off, the brake pedal is applied.
- When the driver door is opened.
When the hybrid system is turned
ON, the engine may run or may not.
In this situation, you may feel a vibra-
tion. This does not indicate a mal-
function. When the “ ” indicator
illuminates, the hybrid system is ready
to start. Even if the engine is off, you
can operate the vehicle as long as the
“ ” indicator is illuminated.
i
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
H9
The hybrid system contains many
electronic components. High volt-
age components, such as cables
and other parts, may emit electro-
magnetic waves. Even when the
electromagnetic cover blocks elec-
tromagnetic emissions, electro-
magnetic waves may have an effect
on electronic appliances. When
your vehicle is not for a long period
of time, the hybrid system will dis-
charge. You need to drive the vehi-
cle several times a month. We rec-
ommend driving at least for 1 hour
or 16 km.When the hybrid battery is
discharged, or when it is impossi-
ble to jump start the vehicle, con-
tact your HYUNDAI dealer.
Virtual Engine Sound System
(VESS)
The Virtual Engine Sound System
generates engine sound for pedestri-
ans to hear vehicle sound because
there is limited sound while motor
power is used.
What Does Regenerative
Braking Do?
It uses an electric motor when decel-
erating and braking and transforms
kinetic energy to electrical energy in
order to charge the high voltage bat-
tery.
Battery
• The vehicle is composed of a high-
voltage battery that drives the
motor and air-conditioner, and an
auxiliary battery (12 V) that drives
the lamps, wipers, and audio sys-
tem.
• The auxiliary battery is automati-
cally charged when the vehicle is in
the ready ( ) mode.
NOTICE
• When you start the hybrid
system with the shift lever in
P (Parking), the “ ” indica-
tor illuminates on the instru-
ment cluster. The driver can
drive the vehicle, even when
the engine is stopped.
• When you leave the vehicle,
you should turn OFF the
hybrid system or locate the
shift lever in P (Park). When
you depress the accelerator
pedal by mistake, or when the
shift lever is not in P (Park),
the vehicle will abruptly move,
possibly resulting in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
H10
Hybrid vehicle components
safety precautions
High voltage battery system
*
1
: Located in the engine compartment
*
2
: Located under the rear seats
OAEQ046015
OAEQ046019
■ HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit) *
1
■ High voltage battery system *
2
Never touch orange colored or
high voltage labeled compo-
nents, including wires, cables,
and connections. When the insu-
lators or covers are damaged or
removed, severe injury or death
from electrocution may occur.
WARNING
While replacing the fuses in the
engine compartment, never
touch the HPCU. The HPCU car-
ries high voltage. Touching the
HPCU may result in electrocu-
tion, serious injury, or death.
WARNING
(Continued)
Never touch the hybrid system.
When you touch the hybrid bat-
tery system, serious injury or
death may occur.
In the hybrid system, the hybrid
battery uses high voltage to
operate the motor and other
components. This high voltage
hybrid battery system can be
very dangerous.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Do not pile up any items in an
area behind the high voltage
battery. In a crash, the battery
may become unstable, or its
performance may degrade.
• Do not apply strong force nor
pile up any items above the
trunk. Such an attempt may
distort the high voltage battery
case, causing a safety problem
or degrading the performance.
• Be careful when loading
inflammable liquid in trunk. It
could cause operational and
safety degradation if the liq-
uid leaks and flows in high
voltage battery
CAUTION
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM
H11
*
3
: Located in the engine compartment
OAEQ046017
■ Drive motor *
3
• Do not disassemble the high
voltage motor connector. The
high voltage motor connector
may contain residual high
voltage. Coming in contact
with high voltage may result
in death or serious injury.
• Your vehicle's hybrid system
should only be inspected or
repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Do not disassemble or assem-
ble the high voltage battery
system. Doing so may result
in electric shock, causing
death or serious injury.
• If you disassemble or assem-
ble hybrid system compo-
nents improperly, it may dam-
age the performance and reli-
ability of your vehicle.
• If electrolyte comes in contact
with your body, clothes or
eyes, immediately flush with a
large quantity of fresh tap
water. Have your eyes exam-
ined by a doctor as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Never assemble or disassemble
the high voltage battery system.
• If you assemble or disassem-
ble the high voltage battery
system, the durability and per-
formance of the vehicle may be
damaged.
• When you want to check the
high voltage battery system,
have the vehicle checked and
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not touch the high voltage
battery and high voltage cable
connected to motor (orange
color). Severe burns and elec-
tric shock may occur. For your
safety, do not touch the cover
of electronic components and
electronic cable. Do not remove
the cover of electronic compo-
nents and electronic cable. In
particular, never touch the high
voltage battery system when
the hybrid system in operation.
It may result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
H12
• When the vehicle is paint baked,
do not bake over 30 minutes in
70°C (158°F) or 20 minutes in
80°C (176°F) degree.
• Do not wash the engine compart-
ment, using water. Water may
cause an electric shock to and
damage the electronic.
NOTICE
• Never use the package mod-
ules (high voltage battery,
inverter and converter) for any
other purpose.
• Do not use an unauthorized
battery charger to charge the
high voltage battery. Doing so
may result in death or serious
injury.
• Never locate the high voltage
system near or in a fire.
• Never drill into or strike the
package module. Otherwise, it
may be damaged. An electric
shock may occur, resulting in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
This hybrid vehicle uses the
hybrid battery system inverter
and converter to generate high
voltage. High voltage in the
hybrid battery system is very
dangerous and may cause
severe burns and electric
shock. This may result in seri-
ous injury or death.
• For your safety, never touch,
replace, disassemble or remove
the hybrid battery system
including components, cables
and connectors. Severe burns
or electric shock may result in
serious injury or death when
you fail to follow this warning.
• When the hybrid battery sys-
tem operates, the hybrid bat-
tery system can be hot. Always
be careful because burns or
electric shock may be caused
by high voltage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not drop water or liquid on
to HPCU, HSG, motor and
fuses. The hybrid system com-
ponents are covered. If you
drop water or liquid on to
hybrid system components, it
may result in electric shock.
WARNING
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))
H13
Service plug Hybrid battery cooling duct
The hybrid battery cooling duct is
located on the left side of the rear
seats. The cooling duct cools down
the hybrid battery. When the hybrid
battery cooling duct is blocked, the
hybrid battery may be overheated.
Do not obstruct the cooling duct with
any other objects.
Never touch the service plug.
Service plug is attached to high
voltage hybrid battery system.
Touching the service plug will
result in death or serious injury.
Service personnel should follow
procedure in service manual.
DANGER
OAEQ046018
OAE036024
• Never clean the cooling duct
of the hybrid battery with a
wet cloth. If any water enters
in the cooling duct of the
hybrid battery, the hybrid bat-
tery may cause an electric
shock, resulting in a serious
damage, an injury or a death.
• The hybrid battery is com-
posed of lithium-ion polymer.
If the hybrid battery is improp-
erly handled, it is dangerous
to the environment. Also it
may cause electrical shock
and severe burns, resulting in
a serious injury or a death.
• Do not spill liquid over the
cooling duct of the hybrid bat-
tery. Doing so is very danger-
ous. It may cause electric
shock or serious injury.
• Do not cover the cooling duct
with objects.
(Continued)
WARNING
H14
Information
Clean the cooling duct for the hybrid
battery with a dry cloth on a regular
basis.
If an accident occurs
i
(Continued)
• Do not put any objects into
the cooling duct of the hybrid
battery. Doing so may cause
loss of cooling duct volume to
the hybrid battery. When the
cooling duct is blocked with
any objects, immediately con-
tact your HYUNDAI dealer.
• Never place a container of liq-
uid on or near the cooling
duct. If the liquid spills, the
hybrid battery located in the
trunk may be damaged.
• Secure all loads in the trunk
to prevent them from being
tossed about before driving.
When a sharp or heavy load
strike with a strong impact or
pierce the interior trunk wall,
the hybrid battery system may
be damaged, deteriorating its
performance.
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))
•
For your safety, do not touch
high voltage cables, connec-
tors and package modules.
High voltage components are
orange in color.
• Exposed cables or wires may
be visible inside or outside of
the vehicle. Never touch the
wires or cables, because an
electrical shock, an injury, or a
death may occur.
• Any gas or electrolyte leakage
from your vehicle is not only
poisonous but also flamma-
ble. Upon witnessing one of
those, open the windows, and
remain a safe distance from
the vehicle out of the road.
Immediately contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and advise
them that a hybrid vehicle is
involved.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• When the vehicle is severely
damaged, remain a safe dis-
tance of 15 meter or more
between your vehicle and other
vehicles/flammables.
If a fire occurs :
• If a small scale fire occurs,
use a fire extinguisher (ABC,
BC) that is meant for electrical
fires.
If it is impossible to extin-
guish the fire in the early
stage, remain a safe distance
from the vehicle and immedi-
ately call your local fire emer-
gency responders. Also,
advise them that a hybrid
vehicle is involved.
If the fire spreads to the high
voltage battery, large amount
of water is needed to put out
the fire.
(Continued)
WARNING
H15
When the hybrid vehicle shuts
off
When the high voltage battery is dis-
charged, when the 12-volt battery is
discharged, or when the fuel tank is
empty, the hybrid system may not
operate while driving. When the
Hybrid system does not operate, do
the followings:
1.Gradually reduce the vehicle
speed. Pull over your vehicle off
the road in a safe area.
2. Locate the shift lever in P (Park).
3.Turn ON the hazard warning flashers.
4.Turn OFF the vehicle, and try to
start the hybrid system again,
while depressing the brake pedal
and turning on the ignition switch.
5.When the hybrid system still does
not operate, refer to "EMERGENCY
STARTING" in the chapter 6.
Before jump-starting the vehicle,
check the fuel level and the exact
procedure to jump start. For further
details, refer to "EMERGENCY
STARTING" in the chapter 6. When
the fuel level is low, do not attempt
to drive the vehicle only with the
battery power. The high voltage bat-
tery may be discharged, and the
hybrid system will turn OFF.
(Continued)
Using small amount of water
or fire extinguishers not
meant for electrical fires
could cause serious injury or
death from electrical shocks.
• Upon witnessing any sparks,
gases, flames, or fuel leakage
of your vehicle, immediately
call emergency services or
contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Also, advise
them that a hybrid vehicle is
involved.
When a submersion in water
occurs:
When your vehicle is flooded in
water, a high-voltage battery
may cause shock or fires. Thus,
turn the hybrid system OFF, take
the key in your possession and
escape to a safe place. Never
attempt physical contact with
your flooded vehicle.
Immediately contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and advise
them that a hybrid vehicle is
involved.
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Important safety precautions .............................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain all children .........................................................2-2
Air bag hazards ................................................................2-2
Driver distraction .............................................................2-2
Control your speed ..........................................................2-3
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety precautions ..........................................................2-6
Front seats..........................................................................2-7
Rear seats .........................................................................2-13
Headrest ...........................................................................2-16
Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-21
Seat belts .............................................................2-25
Seat belt safety precautions ......................................2-25
Seat belt warning light .................................................2-26
Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-29
Additional seat belt safety precautions ...................2-34
Care of seat belts ..........................................................2-36
Child restraint system (CRS) .............................2-38
Our recommendation:Children always in the rear..2-38
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-39
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-41
Air bag - supplemental restraint system ........2-51
Where are the air bags? ..............................................2-54
How does the air bags system operate? .................2-59
What to expect after an air bag inflates ................2-63
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ...........2-65
SRS care ...........................................................................2-70
Additional safety precautions .....................................2-71
Air bag warning labels ..................................................2-72
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2-2
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain all children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate Child
Restraint System. Larger children
should use a booster seat with the
lap/shoulder belt until they can use
the seat belt properly without a
booster seat.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and short adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing. To reduce your risk of distraction
and an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-
tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and conditions per-
mit safe use. NEVER text or email
while driving. Most countries have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some countries and cities also pro-
hibit drivers from using handheld
phones.
IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
• NEVER let the use of a mobile device
distract you from driving. You have a
responsibility to your passengers and
others on the road to always drive
safely, with your hands on the wheel
as well as your eyes and attention on
the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condi-
tion
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such prob-
lems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
2-4
SSEEAATTSS
Safety system of your vehicle
OAE036001
Front seat
1. Forward and backward
2. Seatback angle
3. Seat cushion height*
4. Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
5. Seat warmer */ Air ventilation seat *
6. Headrest
2nd row seat
7. Seatback angle and folding
8. Headrest
9. Armrest
10. Seat warmer*
* : if equipped
■ Left-hand drive
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
OAE036001R
Front seat
1. Forward and backward
2. Seatback angle
3. Seat cushion height*
4. Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
5. Seat warmer */ Air ventilation seat *
6. Headrest
2nd row seat
7. Seatback angle and folding
8. Headrest
9. Armrest
10. Seat warmer*
* : if equipped
■ Right-hand drive
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far
to the rear as possible main-
taining the ability to control of
the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to min-
imize the risk of injuries to
your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
Safety precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-
ting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates. Move
your seat as far back as possible
from front air bags, while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
Do not use a cushion that reduces
friction between the seat and the
passenger.The passenger's hips
may slide under the lap portion
of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.
WARNING
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate Child Restraint
Systems. Children who have outgrown a
booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.
Front seats
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control lever or switches
located on the outside of the seat
cushion. Before driving, adjust the
seat to the proper position so that you
can easily control the steering wheel,
foot pedals and controls on the instru-
ment panel.
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-8
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion for-
ward may cause strong pres-
sure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seat-
back.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center con-
sole. Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seat mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the
rear seats, be careful while
adjusting the front seat posi-
tion.
OAE036002
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
OAE036003
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-10
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down the lever several times,
to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up the lever several times, to
raise the seat cushion.
Power adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
OAE036004
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.
WARNING
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat-
back reaches the desired position.
OAE036006 OAE036007
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the
seats when the seat has been
adjusted as far forward or
rearward as possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the
engine is turned off. This may
result in unnecessary battery
drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time. This
may result in an electrical
malfunction.
CAUTION
2-12
Safety system of your vehicle
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cush-
ion:
1. • Push the front portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion.
• Push the rear portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or down to
lower the height of the seat cush-
ion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
OAE036008
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat,
if equipped)
• The lumbar support can be adjust-
ed by pressing the lumbar support
switch.
• Press the front portion of the switch
(1) to increase support or the rear
portion of the switch (2) to decrease
support.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.
Rear seats
Folding the rear seat
(if equipped)
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
CAUTION
OAE036064
OAE036005
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage
during sudden stops.
WARNING
2-14
Safety system of your vehicle
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position.
2. Lower the rear head rest down(2)
pushing the adjusting button(1).
3.Locate the seatbelt toward the out-
board position before folding down
the seatback. If not, the seatbelt
system may be interfered by the
seatback.
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle.
OAE036018
OAE036065L
OAE036019
OAE036020
OAE036021
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
2
5.To use the rear seat, lift and push
the seatback rearward.
Push the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
OAE036066L
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
When returning the rear seat-
back from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seat-
back. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
2-16
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the seatback to use it.
Headrest
The vehicle’s front and rear seats have
adjustable headrests. The headrests
provide comfort for passengers, but
more importantly they are designed to
help protect passengers from whiplash
and other neck and spinal injuries dur-
ing an accident, especially in a rear
impact collision.
OAE036022
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your headrests:
• Always properly adjust the
headrests for all passengers
BEFORE starting the vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
Adjust the headrests so the
middle of the headrests is at
the same height as the height
of the top of the eyes.
• NEVER adjust the headrest
position of the driver’s seat
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the headrest as close
to the passenger’s head as
possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the headrest locks
into position after adjusting it.
WARNING
OLF034072N
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the headrests.
Front seat headrests
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats are equipped with adjustable
headrests for the passengers safety
and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
NOTICE
When there is no occupant in
the rear seats, adjust the height
of the headrest to the lowest
position. The rear seat headrest
can reduce the visibility of the
rear area.
CAUTION
OLMB033009
OAE036010
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
Forward and rearward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 3 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the head-
rest to it’s furthest rearwards posi-
tion, pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it.
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and
seat cushion raised, the headrest
may come in contact with the sun-
visor or other parts of the vehicle.
Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with using
the seatback angle lever or switch
(1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
NOTICE
OAE036012
OAE036011
■ Type A
■ Type B
OLF034015
OAE036009
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Recline the seatback.
2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropri-
ate height.
4. Recline the seatback (4) with the
seatback angle lever or switch (3).
NEVER allow anyone to travel in a
seat with the headrest removed.
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after rein-
stalling and adjusting it properly.
WARNING
OAE036014
OAE036013
■ Type A
■ Type B
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear seat headrests
The rear seats are equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the passenger’s safety and com-
fort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (1) while pulling the
headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest poles (3) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
OLMB033016
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occupants.
WARNING
OAE036017 OAE036072L
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat warmers and air ventila-
tion seats
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
NOTICE
(Continued)
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in oper-
ation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, caus-
ing a burn or damage to the seat.
WARNING
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the dri-
ver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is placed to the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
Front air ventilation seat
(if equipped)
The air ventilation seats are provided
to cool the front seats by blowing air
through small vent holes on the sur-
face of the seat cushions and seat-
backs.
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion seat is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to cool the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat (if equipped).
i
OAE036015
OAE036016
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
2
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the air venti-
lation seat operating, the operation
will turn OFF.
• The air ventilation seats defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is placed to the ON
position.
To prevent damage to the air ven-
tilation seat:
• Use the air ventilation seat ONLY
when the climate control system
is on. Using the air ventilation
seat for prolonged periods of
time with the climate control sys-
tem off could cause the air venti-
lation seat to malfunction.
• Never use a solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol or gaso-
line to clean the seats.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-
face of the front seats and seat-
backs; this may cause the air vent
holes to become blocked and not
work properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. They may block the air
intake causing the air vents to not
work properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not change the seat covers. It
may damage the air ventilation
seat.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, we recommend that you
have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
2-24
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear seat warmers (if equipped)
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the rear
seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed to the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
Battery cooling duct
The hybrid battery cooling duct is
located on bottom the left rear seats.
The air intake cools down the hybrid
battery.
When the hybrid battery cooling duct
is blocked, the hybrid battery may be
overheated. Do not obstruct the air
intake with any other objects.
i
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
OAE036023 OAE036024
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.
Seat belt safety precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fas-
tened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags (if equipped) are
designed to supplement the seat belt
as an additional safety device, but
they are not a substitute. Most coun-
tries require all occupants of a vehicle
to wear seat belts.
SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• Children under the age of 13
should be properly restrained
in the rear seats.
• Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat, unless
the air bag is deactivated. If a
child is seated in the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and prop-
erly restrain them in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Never wear a seat belt over
fragile objects. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, the seat
belt can damage it.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
(Continued)
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning light
Seat belt warning
Driver’s seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light will illuminate and
chime for approximately 6 seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
after the ignition switch is ON, the
seat belt warning light illuminates
until the belt is fastened.
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-
aged webbing.
• Damaged hardware.
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent.
WARNING
(Continued)
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
OAM032161L
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
If you start to drive without fastening
the seatbelt, warning light will contin-
ue to illumiante until you fasten the
seatbelt.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20km/h the
seat belt warning chime will sound
for approximately 100 seconds and
the corresponding warning light will
blink. (if equipped)
Front passenger’s seat belt warning
(if equipped)
As a reminder to the front passenger,
the front passenger’s seat belt warn-
ing lights will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds each time you turn
the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
If the front passenger’s seat belt is
not fastened when the ignition switch
is turned ON or if it is disconnected
after the ignition switch is turned ON,
the corresponding seat belt warning
light will illuminate until the belt is
fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 9km/h, the
illuminated warning light will start to
blink until you drive under 6km/h.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20km/h the
seat belt warning chime will sound
for approximately 100 seconds and
the corresponding warning light will
blink.
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front pas-
senger's seat belt warning sys-
tem. It is important for the driver
to instruct the passenger to
properly be seated as instructed
in this manual.
WARNING
OTLE035082
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
Information
• You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the center
fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink or illuminate for 6
seconds.
• The front passenger's seat belt
warning may operate when luggage
is placed on the front passenger seat.
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning
(if equipped)
If the ignition switch is turned ON
(engine is not running) when the rear
passenger's lap/shoulder belt is not
fastened, the corresponding seat
belt warning light will illuminate until
the belt is fastened.
And then, the rear corresponding
seat belt warning light will illuminate
for approximately 35 seconds, if any
of following occurs;
- You start the engine when the rear
belt is not fastened.
- You drive over 9km/h when the rear
belt is not fastened.
- The rear belt is disconnected when
driving under 20km/h.
If the rear seat belt is fastened, the
warning light will turn off immediately.
If the rear seat belt is disconnected
when you drive over the 20km/h, the
corresponding seat belt warning light
will blink and warning chime will
sound for 35 seconds.
But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoul-
der belt is/are connected and discon-
nected twice within 9 seconds after
the belt is fastened, the corresponding
seat belt warning light will not operate.
i
OTLE035083
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belt restraint system
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).
There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean for-
ward too quickly.
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
NOTICE
ODH033055
ODH033056
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the fol-
lowing precautions when adjust-
ing the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly. This
allows your strong pelvic bones
to absorb the force of the crash,
reducing the chance of internal
injuries.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door, not over your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twist-
ed, then try again.
OAD035027
■ Front seat
(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illus-
tration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into locked posi-
tion at the appropriate height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
ODH033057
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Rear center seatbelt
(3-point rear center seat belt)
1.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
buckle (A’) until an audible “click" is
heard, indicating the latch is
locked. Make sure the belt is not
twisted.
2. Pull the tongue plate (B) and
insert it into the buckle (B’) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the latch is locked. Make sure the
belt is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
Information
If you are not able to pull out the safe-
ty belt from the retractor, firmly pull
the belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the belt
out smoothly.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's and rear side
passenger’s (if equipped) Pre-tension-
er Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner).
The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to
make sure the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner
seat belts may be activated in crashes
where the frontal collision is severe
enough, together with the air bags.
i
OAE036027
OAE036068L
OLMB033039
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner system acti-
vates, the load limiter (if equipped)
inside the retractor pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
• Always wear your seat belt and
sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
tect you properly in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-ten-
sioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assem-
blies.
WARNING
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioner can become hot
and can burn you.
WARNING
Body work on the front area of
the vehicle may damage the
pre-tensioner seat belt system.
Therefore, we recommend the
system to be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner
(3) SRS control module
The sensor that activates the SRS
control module is connected with
the pre–tensioner seat belts. The
SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed to the ON
position, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS control
module is not malfunctioning. If
the warning light does not illumi-
nate when the vehicle is turned
ON, stays illuminated or illumi-
nates when the vehicle is being
driven, we recommend the pre-
tensioner seat belts and/or SRS
air bags be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Information
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal or side
collisions.
• The pre-tensioners will be activated
even if the seat belts are not worn at
the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in which
the pre-tensioner seat belts were acti-
vated.
i
NOTICE
OLMB033040/Q
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
Additional seat belt safety pre-
cautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, rout-
ed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the lap belt
below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY
across your hips and pelvic bone,
under the rounded part of the belly.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
Most countries have Child Restraint
System laws which require children to
travel in approved Child Restraint
System devices, including booster
seats. The age at which seat belts can
be used instead of Child Restraint
System differs among countries, so
you should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country, and
where you are travelling. Infant and
Child Restraint System must be prop-
erly placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the “Child
Restraint Systems” in this chapter.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, preg-
nant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
WARNING
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a Child
Restraint System appropriate for
the child’s height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving. The violent
forces created during an acci-
dent will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat by a
Child Restraint System that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards
of your country. Before buying any
Child Restraint System, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it
meets Safety Standard of your coun-
try. The Child Restraint System must
be appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
Child Restraint System for this informa-
tion. Refer to “Child Restraint Systems”
in this chapter.
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat should
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoul-
der and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt
out of position. In the event of an acci-
dent, children are afforded the best
safety restrained by a proper Child
Restraint System in the rear seats.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck, they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
• Always make sure larger chil-
dren’s seat belts are worn and
properly adjusted.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
2-36
Seat belt use and injured people
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific rec-
ommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
During an accident, you could be
thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seat back is reclined,
the greater the chance for the pas-
senger's hips to slide under the lap
belt or the passenger's neck to strike
the shoulder belt.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
Safety system of your vehicle
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Driver and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. We recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
Our recommendation:
Children always in the rear
Children under age 13 should always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to min-
imize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seats than in the front
seat. Children too large for a Child
Restraint System must use the seat
belts provided.
Most countries have regulations which
require children to travel in approved
Child Restraint Systems.
The laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which seat
belts can be used instead of Child
Restraint System differs among coun-
tries, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your country,
and where you are travelling.
Child Restraint Systems must be
properly installed in the vehicle seat.
Always use a commercially available
Child Restraint System that meets the
requirements of your country.
Child Restraint System (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rearward-
facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the seat
of the vehicle. Read and comply with
the instructions for installation and use
provided by the manufacturer of the
Child Restraint System.
CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))
Always properly restrain children
in the vehicle. Children of all ages
are safer when riding in the rear
seats. Never place a rearward-
facing Child Restraint System on
the front passenger seat, unless
the air bag is deactivated.
WARNING
•
Always follow the Child Restraint
System manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the Child Restraint
System.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that “hooks”
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate protection in an
accident.
• After an accident, we recom-
mend a HYUNDAI dealer to
check the Child Restraint
System, seat belts, ISOFIX
anchorages and top-tether
anchorages.
WARNING
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a Child Restraint
System for your child, always:
• Make sure the Child Restraint
System has a label certifying that it
meets applicable Safety Standards
of your country.
A Child Restraint System may only
be installed if it was approved in
accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R44 or ECE-R129.
• Select a Child Restraint System
based on your child’s height and
weight. The required label or the
instructions for use typically pro-
vide this information.
• Select a Child Restraint System
that fits the vehicle seating position
where it will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the Child
Restraint System.
Child Restraint System types
There are three main types of Child
Restraint Systems: rearward-facing,
forward-facing and booster Child
Restraint Systems.
They are classified according to the
child’s age, height and weight.
Rearward-facing Child Restraint
System
A rearward-facing Child Restraint
System provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of
the child. The harness system holds
the child in place, and in an accident,
acts to keep the child positioned in the
Child Restraint Systems and reduce
the stress to the fragile neck and spinal
cord.
OAE036062
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
All children under the age of one year
must always ride in a rearward-facing
Child Restraint System. There are dif-
ferent types of rearward-facing Child
Restraint Systems: infant-only Child
Restraint Systems can only be used
rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-
1 Child Restraint Systems typically
have higher height and weight limits
for the rearward-facing position, allow-
ing you to keep your child rearward-
facing for a longer period of time.
Keep using Child Restraint Systems
in the rearward-facing position as long
as children fit within the height and
weight limits allowed by the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer.
Forward-facing Child Restraint
System
A forward-facing Child Restraint System
provides restraint for the child’s body
with a harness. Keep children in a for-
ward-facing Child Restraint System
with a harness until they reach the
top height or weight limit allowed by
your Child Restraint System’s manu-
facturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing Child Restraint System, your
child is ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is a Child Restraint
System designed to improve the fit of
the vehicle’s seat belt system. A boost-
er seat positions the seat belt so that it
fits properly over the stronger parts of
your child’s body. Keep your children in
booster seats until they are big
enough to fit in a seat belt properly.
For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap
belt must lie comfortable across the
upper thighs, not the stomach. The
shoulder belt should lie comfortable
across the shoulder and chest and
not across the neck or face. Children
under age 13 must always be proper-
ly restrained to minimize the risk of
injury in an accident, sudden stop or
sudden maneuver.
OAE036028
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper Child Restraint
System for your child and checking
that the Child Restraint System fits
properly on the seating position, there
are three general steps for a proper
installation:
• Properly secure the Child Restraint
System to the vehicle.
All Child
Restraint Systems must be secured
to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX
anchorage and/or with the support
leg.
• Make sure the Child Restraint
System is firmly secured. After
installing a Child Restraint System
to the vehicle, push and pull the
seat forward and from side-to-side
to verify that it is securely attached
to the seat. A Child Restraint
System secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
When installing a Child Restraint
System, adjust the vehicle seat and
seatback (up and down, forward and
rearward) so that your child fits in
the Child Restraint System in a con-
fortable manner.
• Secure the child in the Child
Restraint System. Make sure the
child is properly strapped in the
Child Restraint System according
to the Child Restraint System man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
Before installing your Child
Restraint System always:
Read and follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of
the Child Restraint System.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a Child
Restraint System, the headrest
of the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
WARNING
A Child Restraint System in a
closed vehicle can become very
hot. To prevent burns, check the
seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the
Child Restraint System.
CAUTION
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
ISOFIX anchorage and top-teth-
er anchorage (ISOFIX anchorage
system) for children
The ISOFIX system holds a Child
Restraint System during driving and in
an accident.This system is designed to
make installation of the Child Restraint
System easier and reduce the possi-
bility of improperly installing your
Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX
system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the Child
Restraint System. The ISOFIX sys-
tem eliminates the need to use seat
belts to secure the Child Restraint
System to the rear seats.
ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each ISOFIX seat-
ing position that will accommodate a
Child Restraint System with lower
attachments.
To use the ISOFIX system in your vehi-
cle, you must have a Child Restraint
System with ISOFIX attachments.
The Child Restraint System manu-
facturer will provide you with instruc-
tions on how to use the Child
Restraint System with its attach-
ments for the ISOFIX anchorages.
ISOFIX anchorages have been pro-
vided in the left and right outboard
rear seating positions. Their locations
are shown in the illustration.
OAE036063
Do not attempt to install a Child
Restraint System using ISOFIX
anchorages in the rear center
seating position. There are no
ISOFIX anchorages provided for
this seat. Using the outboard seat
anchorages, for the CRS installa-
tion on the rear center seating
position, can damage the anchor-
ages.
WARNING
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
(1) : ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator
(Type A- ,Type B- )
(2) : ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX anchorages are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions, indicated
by the symbols.
Securing a Child Restraint
System with the “ISOFIX
Anchorage System”
To install an ISOFIX-compatible Child
Restraint System in either of the rear
outboard seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the ISOFIX anchorages.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchorages that could prevent
a secure connection between the
Child Restraint System and the
ISOFIX anchorages.
3. Place the Child Restraint System
on the vehicle seat, then attach the
seat to the ISOFIX anchorages
according to the instructions provid-
ed by the Child Restraint System
manufacturer.
4. Follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer
for proper installation and connec-
tion of the ISOFIX attachments on
the Child Restraint System to the
ISOFIX anchorages.
OAE036031
ISOFIX Anchorage
Position Indicator
ISOFIX Anchorage
Take the following precautions
when using the ISOFIX system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your Child Restraint System.
• To prevent the child from reach-
ing and taking hold of unre-
tracted seat belts, buckle all
unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
Child Restraint System to a
single anchorage. This could
cause the anchor or attach-
ment to come loose or break.
• Always have the ISOFIX sys-
tem inspected by your dealer
after an accident. An accident
can damage the ISOFIX system
and may not properly secure
the Child Restraint System.
WARNING
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a Child Restraint
System seat with “Top-tether
Anchorage” system
Top-tether anchorages for Child
Restraint Systems are located on the
rear of the seatbacks.
1. Route the Child Restraint System
top-tether strap over the seatback.
Placing the top tether strap, please
follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System manufacturer.
2. Connect the top-tether strap to the
top-tether anchorage, then tighten
the top-tether strap according to the
instructions of your Child Restraint
System's manufacturer to firmly
attach the Child Restraint System to
the seat.
OAE036029
OAE036030
Take the following precautions
when installing the top-tether:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your Child Restraint System.
• NEVER attach more than one
Child Restraint System to a
single ISOFIX top-tether
anchorage. This could cause
the anchorage or attachment
to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the top-tether to
anything other than the cor-
rect top-tether anchorage. It
may not work properly if
attached to something else.
• Child Restraint System anchor-
ages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted Child Restraint
System.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
WARNING
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX Forward-Facing Child Restraint Systems of
universal category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems given in the
attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific vehicle",
"restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX Child Restraint System in
this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost
position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX Child Restraint System size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
(height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint
System (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
Mass Group Size Class Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard
(Left)
Rear Outboard
(Right)
Rear Center
Carrycot
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
0 : UP to 10kg E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
0+ : UP to 13kg
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
I : 9 to 18kg
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
B ISO/F2 - IUF + IL IUF + IL -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF + IL IUF + IL -
A ISO/F3 - IUF + IL IUF + IL -
2-46
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a Child Restraint
System with a lap/shoulder belt
When not using the ISOFIX system,
all Child Restraint Systems must be
secured to a rear seat with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt.
Installing a Child Restraint System
with a lap/shoulder belt
To install a Child Restraint System
on the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the Child Restraint System
on a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through the
Child Restraint System, following
the Child Restraint System manu-
facturer’s instructions.
Make sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
Information
When using the rear center seat belt,
you should also refer to the “3-point
Rear Center Seat Belt” in this chapter.
i
OLMB033044
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the Child Restraint System while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
4. Push and pull on the Child Restraint
System to confirm that the seat belt
is holding it firmly in place.
If your Child Restraint System manu-
facturer recommends the use of a
top-tether with the lap/shoulder belt,
see page 2-44.
To remove the Child Restraint System,
press the release button on the buckle
and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out
of the Child Restraint System and
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
i
OLMB033045 OLMB033046
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to
ECE regulations (for Europe)
U = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group.
U* = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group (If front passenger seat is not
adjustable for the height, you should adjust the seat to upward properly. (This step is necessary to restrain child seat to your
vehicle.)
❈ Height adjutable device of Front passenger seat is an optional feature.
UF = Suitable for forward facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
L = Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or
"semi-universal" categories.
B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front Passenger Second Row
Air bag
activated
Air bag
deactivated
Outboard Left
Center (3-point
seat belt)
Outboard
Right
Group 0
(0-9months)
up to 10kg X U* U U U
Group 0 +
(0-2years)
up to 13kg X U* U U U
Group I
(9months-4years)
9 to 18kg X U* U U U
Group II
(15 to 25kg)
15 to 25kg UF U* U U U
Group III
(22 to 36kg)
22 to 36kg UF U* U U U
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems
(except Europe)
U = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group.
U* = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group (If front passenger seat is not
adjustable for the height, you should adjust the seat to upward properly. (This step is necessary to restrain child seat to your
vehicle.)
❈ Height adjutable device of Front passenger seat is an optional feature.
UF = Suitable for forward facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
L = Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or
"semi-universal" categories.
B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front Passenger Second Row
Air bag
Equipped
Air bag NOT
Equipped
Outboard
Left
Center
(3-point belt)
Center
(2-point belt)
Outboard
Right
Group 0
(0-9months)
up to 10kg X U* U U UF U
Group 0 +
(0-2years)
up to 13kg X U* U U UF U
Group I
(9months-4years)
9 to 18kg X U* U U UF U
Group II
(15 to 25kg)
15 to 25kg UF U* U U UF U
Group III
(22 to 36kg)
22 to 36kg UF U* U U UF U
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
i-Size Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations (for Europe)
i-U : Suitable for i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems forward and rearward-facing
i-UF : Suitable for forward-facing i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems only
X : Seat position not suitable for i-size CRS.
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front passenger
Outboard
Second Row
Outboard Left Center
Outboard
Right
i-size Child Restraint Systems X i-U X i-U
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
AAIIRR BBAAGG -- SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
2
OAE036035/OAE036073L
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag*
2. Passenger’s front air bag*
3. Side air bag*
4. Curtain air bag*
5. Knee air bag*
6. Front passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
■ Left-hand drive
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
OAE036035R/OAE036073R
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag*
2. Passenger’s front air bag*
3. Side air bag*
4. Curtain air bag*
5. Knee air bag*
6. Front passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
■ Right-hand drive
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The vehicles are equipped with a
Supplemental Air Bag System for the
driver’s seat and front passenger’s
seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts Child Restraint Systems - every trip, every
time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your
seat belt when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any Child Restraint System or booster seat in
the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.
An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing
serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
Where are the air bags?
Driver’s and passenger’s front
air bags (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both
the driver and passenger seating
positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the let-
ters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad
covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passen-
gers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone in case of a frontal impact of
sufficient severity.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from inflating front
air bags, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAE036032
OAE036033
■ Driver’s knee air bag
OAE036036
■ Passenger’s front air bag
■ Driver’s front air bag
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The purpose of the switch is to dis-
able the passenger’s front air bag in
order to transport occupants who are
at increased risk for air bag-related
injury due to age, size, or medical
condition.
To deactivate the passenger’s front
air bag:
Insert the key or a similar rigid device
into the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and turn it to the
OFF position. The passenger air bag
OFF indicator ( ) will illuminate and
stay on until the passenger’s front air
bag is reactivated.
OAE036073L OAE036070L
(Continued)
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stickers)
should be placed over or near
the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box. Such
objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to
deploy.
• Do not attach any objects on
front windshield and inside mir-
ror.
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
To reactivate the passenger’s front
air bag:
Insert the key or a similar rigid device
into the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON
position. The passenger air bag ON
indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay
on for 60 seconds.
Information
The passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
i
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the passenger air
bag OFF indicator is illuminat-
ed. During a collision, the air
bag will not inflate if the indica-
tor is illuminated. Turn on the
passenger’s front air bag or
have your passenger move to
the rear seat.
WARNING
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions,
the following conditions may
occur:
• The air bag warning light ( )
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
• The passenger air bag OFF
indicator ( ) will not illumi-
nate and the ON indicator ( )
will come on and go off after
approximately 60 seconds.
The passenger’s front air bag
will inflate in a frontal impact
even though the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch is
set to the OFF position.
• We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and the SRS air
bag system as soon as possi-
ble.
WARNING
OAE036069L
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Side air bags (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s
driver and the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact col-
lisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAE036037
OAE036038
(Continued)
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident
it may cause vehicle damage
or personal injury especially
when air bag is inflated.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
(Continued)
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
Curtain air bags (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and impact.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact situations.
(Continued)
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not put any objects
between the side air bag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition switch
is in the ON position or this
may cause the side air bags to
inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE036041
OAE036042
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure Child Restraint
System as far away from the
door as possible.
(Continued)
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
2
❈ Do not hang other objects except
clothes. In an accident it may
cause vehicle damage or personal
injury especially when air bag is
inflated.
How does the air bags system
operate?
The SRS consists of the following
components:
(1) Driver's front air bag module/
Driver’s knee air bag module
(2) Passenger's front air bag module
(3) Side air bag modules/
Side impact sensors
(4) Curtain air bag modules
(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies
(6) Air bag warning light
(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)
(8) Front impact sensors
(9) Side pressure sensors
(10) Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF indicator
(front passenger's seat only)
(11) Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
2-59
(Continued)
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area the
air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front and
rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
OAEE036061L
2-60
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration. The
system checks the air bag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light indi-
cates that there is a potential problem
with your air bag system.
During a moderate to severe frontal
collision, sensors will detect the vehi-
cle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the con-
trol unit will inflate the front air bags,
at the time and with the force needed.
The front air bags help protect the driv-
er and front passenger by responding
to frontal impacts in which seat belts
alone cannot provide adequate
restraint. When needed, the side air
bags help provide protection in the
event of a side impact or rollover by
supporting the side upper body area.
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate
if necessary) only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of certain
frontal or side collisions to help pro-
tect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags
are designed to inflate based upon
the severity of a collision and its direc-
tion. These two factors determine
whether the sensors produce an elec-
tronic deployment/inflation signal.
Safety system of your vehicle
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following condi-
tions occur, your SRS is mal-
functioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
SRS as soon as possible if any
of these conditions occur.
WARNING
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
2
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an acci-
dent. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The speed
of air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which to
inflate the air bag between the
occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries and is thus a
necessary part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag. An air bag needs
space to inflate. It is recommended
that drivers sit as far as possible
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the front pas-
senger's forward motion, reducing
the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
OLMB033055
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OLMB033056
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OLMB033054
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
What to expect after an air bag
inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD hold-
er, stickers, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box where the passen-
ger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
WARNING
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after
impact to reduce prolonged
exposure to the smoke and
powder released by the inflat-
ing air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag stor-
age area’s internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold
water and mild soap.
• We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the air bag immediately after
deployment. Air bags are
designed to be used only once.
WARNING
2-64
Safety system of your vehicle
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may feel
substantial discomfort in breathing
because of the contact of your chest
with both the seat belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. The powder may
aggravate asthma for some people. If
you experience breathing problems
after an air bag deployment, seek
medical attention immediately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this
is the case, wash and rinse with cold
water immediately and seek medical
attention if the symptoms persist.
Do not install a Child Restraint
System on the front passenger
seat
Never install a Child Restraint System
in the front passenger seat, unless the
air bag is deactivated
OYDESA2042
OLM034310
■ Type A
■ Type B
NEVER use a rearward facing
Child Restraint System on a seat
protected by an ACTIVE AIR BAG
in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
WARNING
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision?
There are certain types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional protec-
tion. These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle
indicates a collision energy absorp-
tion, and is not an indicator of whether
or not an air bag should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
•
Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards or
replace the bumper with a non-
genuine part.This may adverse-
ly affect the collision and air
bag deployment performance.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Place the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
tion, when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• We recommend that all air bag
repairs are conducted by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2-66
Safety system of your vehicle
1. SRS control module*
2. Front impact sensor*
3. Side pressure sensor (front)*
4. Side impact sensor (B-pillar)*
* : if equipped
OAE036043/OAE036044/OAE036045/OAE036046/OAE036047
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the severity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate in frontal collisions, they also
may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in side impact collisions, but
they may inflate in other collisions if
the side impact sensors detect a suf-
ficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OAE036049
OAE036050
OAE036048
2-68
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severity,
vehicle speed and angles of impact.
OAE036052
OAE036051
OAE036053
2-69
Safety system of your vehicle
2
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to “ride” under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
“underride” collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
Information
The side and/or curtain air bags may
inflate when the vehicle is rolled over
by a side impact collision, if the vehi-
cle is equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags.
i
OAE036061 OAE036054 OAE036055
2-70
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-
cle structure.
SRS care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, we recommend that the system
be immediately inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
We recommend any work on the SRS
system, such as removing, installing,
repairing, or any work on the steering
wheel, the front passenger's panel,
front seats and roof rails be performed
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
OAE036056
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death take the follow-
ing precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• We recommend that inflated
air bags be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-71
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Additional safety precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position may cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions must
be observed. Consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for the
necess
ary information. Failure
to follow these precautions
could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
2-72
Safety system of your vehicle
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning labels
Air bag warning labels are attached
to alert the passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
Be sure to read all of the information
about the air bags that are installed on
your vehicle in this Owner’s Manual.
OAD035053
■ Left-hand drive
OAE036060
■ Right-hand drive
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4
Remote key .......................................................................3-4
Smart key ...........................................................................3-7
Immobilizer system ........................................................3-11
Door locks.............................................................3-12
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .....3-12
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ........3-14
Auto door lock/unlock features ................................3-16
Child-protector rear door locks..................................3-16
Theft-alarm system.............................................3-17
Driver position memory system ........................3-18
Storing memory positions.............................................3-18
Easy access function ....................................................3-19
Steering wheel......................................................3-20
Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-20
Tilt steering / Telescope steering...............................3-21
Heated steering wheel...................................................3-21
Horn....................................................................................3-22
Mirrors...................................................................3-22
Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-22
Outside rearview mirror ..............................................3-24
Windows ................................................................3-27
Power windows ..............................................................3-27
Sunroof..................................................................3-33
Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-33
Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-33
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-34
Sunshade...........................................................................3-35
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-35
Exterior features .................................................3-36
Hood ...................................................................................3-36
Tailgate...............................................................................3-38
Fuel filler door.................................................................3-39
Instrument cluster................................................3-42
Instrument cluster control ............................................3-43
Gauges and meters.........................................................3-44
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-50
LCD display messages ..................................................3-62
LCD display ..........................................................3-71
LCD display control.........................................................3-71
LCD modes (for cluster type A) ..................................3-72
LCD modes (for cluster type B)...................................3-79
Trip computer .......................................................3-86
3
Light .......................................................................3-91
Exterior lights ..................................................................3-91
Welcome system ............................................................3-97
Interior lights....................................................................3-98
Wipers and washers ..........................................3-101
Windshield wipers ........................................................3-101
Windshield washers ....................................................3-103
Driver assist system ..........................................3-104
Rear view camera ........................................................3-104
Rear parking assist system ........................................3-105
Parking assist system .................................................3-108
Defroster.............................................................3-111
Rear window defroster ...............................................3-111
Automatic climate control system...................3-112
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-113
Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-114
System operation..........................................................3-121
System maintenance....................................................3-124
Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-126
Automatic climate control system ............................3-126
Defogging logic ............................................................3-127
Auto defogging system ..............................................3-128
Climate control additional features.................3-129
Clean air .........................................................................3-129
Sunroof inside air recirculation ...............................3-129
Storage compartment........................................3-130
Center console storage ...............................................3-130
Glove box ........................................................................3-130
Sunglass holder ............................................................3-131
Multi box ........................................................................3-131
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Interior features ..............................................3-132
Ashtray ...........................................................................3-132
Cup holder.......................................................................3-132
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-133
Power outlet .................................................................3-134
USB charger...................................................................3-135
Wireless cellular phone charging system ..............3-135
Cigarette lighter ...........................................................3-137
Clock.................................................................................3-137
Clothes hanger .............................................................3-138
Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................3-138
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-139
3
3-4
Convenient features of your vehicle
Remote key
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start
the engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Tailgate Unlock
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3. The doors will lock. The hazard
warning lights will blink. Also, the
outside rearview mirror will fold, if
the outside rearview mirror folding
switch is in the AUTO position (if
equipped).
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will unfold, if the outside rearview
mirror folding switch is in the
AUTO position (if equipped).
Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
i
AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Unattended children
could place the key in the igni-
tion switch and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OHG040006L
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tailgate unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Tailgate Unlock button
(3) on the remote key for more
than one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times. Once the tailgate
is opened and then closed, the
tailgate will lock automatically.
Information
• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-
gate will lock automatically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.
Start-up
For detailed information refer to “Key
Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the remote key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
the car from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
3
OAE046002L
3-6
Remote key precautions
The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the remote
key.
When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the remote key, it is rec-
ommended that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the remote key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal could
be blocked by your mobile phones
normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the remote key and your
mobile phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and always try to main-
tain an adequate distance between
the two devices.
Information
Changes or modifications not express-
ly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will not
be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.
NOTICE
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLM042302
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not work-
ing correctly, it is recommended that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
and regulation.
Smart key
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start
the engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Tailgate Unlock
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink. Also, the outside rearview
mirror will fold, if the outside
rearview mirror folding switch is in
the AUTO position (if equipped).
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
i
3
OBA043222IN OAE046001
3-8
Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the tailgate is
open.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Unlock but-
ton (2) on the smart key.
3. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will unfold, if the outside rearview
mirror folding switch is in the AUTO
position. (if equipped)
Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with-
in 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the out-
side door handle. Other people can
also open the doors without the
smart key in possession.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Tailgate unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the tailgate handle
button or press the Tailgate Unlock
button (3) on the smart key for
more than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automat-
ically.
Information
After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-
gate will lock automatically after 30
seconds unless the tailgate is opened.
i
ii
Convenient features of your vehicle
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OAE046001
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the Engine
Start/Stop button in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart
key:
• Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets
damp (due to drinks or moisture),
or is heated, internal circuit may
malfunction, excluding the car
from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
Insert the mechanical key into the
key hole on the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two smart keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key, it
is recommended that you should
immediately take the vehicle and
remaining key to your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle,
if necessary.
NOTICE
3
OAE046034L
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
Smart key precautions
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the trans-
mitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your vehi-
cle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, it is
recommended that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and always try to main-
tain an adequate distance between
the two devices.
Information
Changes or modifications not express-
ly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will not
be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
NOTICE
i
OLF044008
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not work-
ing correctly, it is recommended that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) and regulation.
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer sys-
tem indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
NOTICE
i
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-12
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
To remove the cover:
1. Pull out the door handle (1).
2. Press the lock (2) located inside
the bottom part of the cover with a
key or flat-head screwdriver.
3. Push out the cover while pressing
the lock.
To install the cover:
1. Pull out the door handle.
2. Install the cover.
After removing the cover, turn the
key toward the front of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock.
If you lock/unlock the driver's door
with a key, all vehicle doors will
lock/unlock automatically.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Remote key
To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
To unlock the doors, press the Door
Unlock button (2) on the remote key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
Convenient features of your vehicle
OHG040006L
OAE046188L
LL
LL
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
UU
UU
nn
nn
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
Smart key
To lock the doors, press the button on
the outside door handle while carry-
ing the smart key with you or press
the door lock button on the smart key.
To unlock the doors, press the button
on the outside door handle while car-
rying the smart key with you or press
the door unlock button on the smart
key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
i
i
OAE046001
OBA043224IN
LL
LL
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
//
//
UU
UU
nn
nn
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position.
The red mark (2) on the door lock
button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
key is in the ignition switch and any
front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
Information
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manu-
al) while simultaneously pulling on the
door handle.
Operate the other door locks and han-
dles, front and rear.
Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
With the central door lock
switch
When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
i
OAE046005
OAE046004
UU
UU
nn
nn
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
//
//
LL
LL
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle in
a crash is increased.
WARNING
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.
WARNING
Always secure your vehicle
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion, engage the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position, close
all windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.
WARNING
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause dam-
age or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
WARNING
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 15
km/h (9 mph).
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD
display. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
Child-protector rear door locks
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors.The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open if the
inner door handle is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
key (or screwdriver) (1) into the hole
and turn it to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
OAE046006L
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle. The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occurs:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The tailgate is opened without
using the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati-
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from outside
the vehicle with the remote key or
smart key or by pressing the button
on the outside of the door handles
with the smart key in your posses-
sion.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set, open-
ing any door, the tailgate, or the hood
without using the remote key or smart
key will cause the alarm to activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the tailgate, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the tailgate, or
the doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
Information
• Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with
the remote key or smart key, open
the doors by using the mechanical
key and place the ignition switch in
the ON position (for remote key) or
start the engine (for smart key) and
wait for 30 seconds.
• When the system is disarmed but a
door or tailgate is not opened within
30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
Information
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm
system will have a label attached to
the vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
i
i
TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM
3
OJC040170
3-18
Convenient features of your vehicle
The Driver Position Memory System
is provided to store and recall the fol-
lowing memory settings with a sim-
ple button operation.
- Driver's seat position
- Outside rearview mirror position
- Instrument panel illumination intensity
Information
• If the battery is disconnected, the
memory settings will be erased.
• If the Driver Position Memory
System does not operate normally,
we recommend that you have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing memory positions
1. Move the shift lever into P while the
ignition switch or the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion.
2. Adjust the driver's seat position,
outside rearview mirror position
and instrument panel illumination
intensity to the desired position.
3. Press the SET button. The system
will beep once and notify you
"Press button to save settings"on
the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 4 seconds. The sys-
tem will beep twice when the mem-
ory has been successfully stored.
5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will
appear on the LCD display.
i
DDRRIIVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAE046036L
Never attempt to operate the driv-
er position memory system while
the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Recalling memory positions
1. Move the shift lever into P while the
ignition switch or the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat posi-
tion, outside rearview mirror and
instrument panel illumination will
automatically adjust to the stored
position (if equipped).
3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied"
will appear on the LCD display.
Information
• While recalling the "1" memory
position, pressing the SET or 1 but-
ton temporarily stops the adjust-
ment of the recalled memory posi-
tion. Pressing the 2 button recalls
the "2" memory position.
• While recalling the "2" memory
position, pressing the SET or 2 but-
ton temporarily stops the adjust-
ment of the recalled memory posi-
tion. Pressing the 1 button recalls
the "1" memory position.
• While recalling the stored positions,
pressing one of the control buttons
for the driver's seat, outside
rearview mirror, or instrument
panel illumination will cause the
movement of that component to stop
and move in the direction that the
control button is pressed.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows:
The shift lever is in P
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the ignition key is inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the OFF position and
the driver’s door is opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the vehicle is turned
ON or the driver’s door is closed
with the smart key with you.
You can activate or deactivate the
Easy Access Function from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
i
3-20
Electric power steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Also, the steering effort becomes
heavier as the vehicle’s speed
increases and becomes lighter as
the vehicle’s speed decreases for
better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate nor-
mally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate or blink on the instru-
ment cluster. The steering wheel
may become difficult to control
or operate. Take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When abnormality is detected in
the electric power steering sys-
tem, to prevent a deadly acci-
dent, the steering assist function
will stop. At this time, the warn-
ing light turns on or blinks on
the cluster. The steering wheel
may become difficult to control
or operate. Have your vehicle
checked immediately, after mov-
ing the vehicle to a safe zone.
Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the igni-
tion switch or the Engine Start/Stop
button in the ON position.
This happens as the system per-
forms the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics is completed,
the steering wheel will return to its
normal condition.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
placed to the ON or LOCK/OFF
position (Without Smart key system).
A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON or OFF position.
(With Smart key system)
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-
ing speed.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal
noise may occur. If temperature
rises, the noise will disappear. This
is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if
you turn the steering wheel all the
way to the left or right continuously,
the steering wheel effort increases.
This is not a system malfunction. As
time passes, the steering wheel
effort will return to its normal con-
dition.
i
NOTICE
SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Tilt steering / Telescope steering
Information
After adjustment, sometimes the lock-
release lever may not lock the steering
wheel.
It is not a malfunction. This occurs
when two gears are not engaged cor-
rectly. In this case, adjust the steering
wheel again and then lock the steering
wheel.
Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on
the steering wheel column and adjust
the steering wheel angle (2) and posi-
tion (3, if equipped). Move the steer-
ing wheel, so it points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Make sure you can see the instrument
panel warning lights and gauges.
After adjusting, pull up the lock-
release lever (1) to lock the steering
wheel in place. Push the steering
wheel both up and down to be cer-
tain it is locked in position. Always
adjust the position of the steering
wheel before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running,
press the heated steering wheel but-
ton to warm the steering wheel. The
indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again. The indicator
on the button will turn off.
i
Never adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control and cause
severe personal injury, death or
accidents.
WARNING
OAE046007
OAE046008
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 min-
utes after the heated steering wheel is
turned on.
When the engine is turned off during
the engine and the heated steering
wheel is on, the timer function of heat-
ed steering wheel will be reset.
To reuse heated steering wheel, press
button again.
Do not install any cover or acces-
sory on the steering wheel. This
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel. The horn will operate
only when this area is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
Inside rearview mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to the center on the
view through the rear window.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OAE046009
MMIIRRRROORRSS
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
WARNING
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lamp of the car behind you in night-
time or low light driving conditions.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror. The sensor detects the light
level around the vehicle, and auto-
matically adjusts to control the head-
lamp glare from vehicles behind you.
Whenever the shift lever is placed in
R (Reverse), the mirror will automat-
ically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
NOTICE
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
OAE046010
Day
Night
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview
mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button is in
the ON position.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors.
The mirror can be adjusted remotely
with the remote switch.
The mirror heads can be folded to
prevent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
OAD045010
OAE046013
II
II
nn
nn
dd
dd
ii
ii
cc
cc
aa
aa
tt
tt
oo
oo
rr
rr
• The right outside rearview mir-
ror is convex. In some coun-
tries, the left outside rearview
mirror is also convex. Objects
seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or turn your head and
look to determine the actual
distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while driving.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
with very warm water, or move
the vehicle to a warm place and
allow the ice to melt.
Adjusting the rearview mirrors:
1. Press either the L (left side) or R
(right side) button (1) to select the
rearview mirror you would like to
adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
(2) to position the selected mirror
up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button
into neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand or
the motor may be damaged.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE046014
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Electric type (if equipped)
Left : The mirror will unfold.
Right : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO) : The mirror will fold
or unfold automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the remote key.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unnec-
essary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than
necessary while the engine is not
running.
Do not fold the electric type out-
side rearview mirror by hand. It
could cause motor failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE046015
OAE046016
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power windows (if equipped)
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped
WWIINNDDOOWWSS
OAE046019
■ Left-hand drive
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped
OAE046019R
■ Right-hand drive
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows. Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door's
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or OFF position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the Power
Windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear win-
dows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demon-
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately one
inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.
i
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
WARNING
OAE046020
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up or press down
and release the switch.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, it is recom-
mended that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
stop and lower approximately 30 cm
(12 inches) to allow the object to be
cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal fea-
ture, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
OLF044032
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “Auto Up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passengers'
doors by pressing the power window
lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The driver's master control can only
operate the driver’s power window.
• The front passenger's control cannot
operate the front passenger's power
window.
• The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passengers'
power window.
i
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 4 mm (0.16
inch) in diameter caught between
the window glass and the upper
window channel may not be
detected by the automatic reverse
window and the window will not
stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
dow operation by a child.
WARNING
OAE046021
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
NOTICE
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
• NEVER leave any child unat-
tended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inad-
vertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion (pressed). Serious injury
can result from unintentional
window operation by the child.
• Do not extend your head,
arms or body outside the win-
dows while driving.
WARNING
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control
switch located on the overhead con-
sole.
The sunroof can be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK(or OFF) position.
However, if the front door is opened,
the sunroof cannot be operated even
within 30 seconds.
Sunroof opening and closing
To open:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
Sliding the sunroof
Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position completely
opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation, press
the sunroof control lever backward or
forward and release the switch.
Information
To reduce wind noise while driving, it
is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 7 cm before the maxi-
mum slide open position).
To prevent damage to the sunroof
and the motor, do not continue to
press the sunroof control lever
after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).
NOTICE
i
OAD045022
OAD045023
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a small obstacle is between
the sliding glass and the sunroof
sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
Tilt the sunroof open:
Push the sunroof control lever
upward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof:
Press the sunroof lever forward until
the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
OLFC044035CN OAD045024
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are
safely out of the way before
closing the sunroof to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.
WARNING
• Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your
vehicle. If the sunroof is
opened, rain or snow may leak
through the sunroof and wet
the interior as well as cause
theft.
(Continued)
CAUTION
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel, which can
make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged. In
cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly.
Information
After washing the vehicle or after a
rain, be sure to wipe off the water on
the sunroof before operating the sun-
roof.
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatical-
ly with the sunroof when the glass
panel moves. If you want it closed,
move the sunshade manually.
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-
lowings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnect-
ed or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. It is rec-
ommended to reset the sunroof
while the engine is running.
2. Push the control lever forward. The
sunroof will close completely or tilt
depending on the condition of the
sunroof.
3. Release the control lever until the
sunroof does not move.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
OAD045037
(Continued)
• Do not allow children to oper-
ate the sunroof.
• Do not extend any luggage
out side the sunroof while
driving.
3-36
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Convenient features of your vehicle
4. Push the control lever forward
about 10 seconds.
- When the sunroof is in the close
position :
The glass will tilt and slightly move
up and down.
- When the sunroof is in the tilt posi-
tion:
The glass will slightly move up
and down.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, try again from step 2.
5. Within 3 seconds, push the control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide
Close.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, try again from step 2.
6. Release the sunroof control lever
after all operation has completed.
(The sunroof system has been
reset.)
Information
• If the sunroof does not reset when
the vehicle battery is disconnected
or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, the sunroof may not operate
normally.
• For more detailed information, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Hood
Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
i
OAE046026
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the second-
ary latch up (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
4. Pull out the support rod.
5. Hold the hood opened with the
support rod (1).
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood halfway (lifted
approximately 30cm from the
closed position) and push down to
securely lock in place. Then double
check to be sure the hood is secure.
OAE046027
• Grasp the support rod in the
area wrapped in rubber. The
rubber will help prevent you
from being burned by hot
metal when the engine is hot.
• The support rod must be
inserted completely into the
hole provided whenever you
inspect the engine compart-
ment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possi-
bly injuring you.
WARNING
OAD045039
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tailgate
Opening the tailgate
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park) and set the parking brake.
2. Then do one of the following :
- Press the Remote key or Smart
Key Tailgate Unlock button for
more than one second.
- Press the button on the tailgate
itself with the Smart Key in your
possession.
3. Lift the tailgate lid up.
Closing the tailgate
Lower the tailgate lid and press down
until it locks. To be sure the tailgate
lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again.
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around hood
opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away.
Check there is no hood open
warning light or message dis-
played on the instrument clus-
ter. If the hood is not latched
while the vehicle is moving, the
chime will sound to warn the
driver the hood is not fully
latched. Driving with the hood
opened may cause a total loss
of visibility, which might result
in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
WARNING
OAE046022
Always keep the tailgate lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
OAE046031
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
To prevent damage to the tailgate lift
cylinders and the attached hardware,
always close the tailgate before driv-
ing.
In cold and wet climates, tailgate
lock and tailgate mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
Fuel filler door
Opening the fuel filler door
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Push the fuel filler door opener
button.
NOTICE
i
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the tailgate of the vehicle at
any time. If the tailgate is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
serious injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventila-
tion, exhaust fumes and rapid
heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather con-
ditions. The tailgate is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle’s crush zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and keys should be
kept out of the reach of chil-
dren. Parents should teach
their children about the dan-
gers of playing in tailgates.
WARNING
OAE046024
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it “clicks” one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
i
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAE046025
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by touch-
ing, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric capable of
producing static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
NOTICE
i
(Continued)
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact between
your bare hand and the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Power gauge
2. Speedometer
3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OAE046100L/OAE046187L
■■
Type B
■■
Type A
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR
The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges
and meters" in this chapter.
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument cluster control
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle's position lights or
headlights are on, press the illumina-
tion control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination con-
trol button, the interior switch illumi-
nation intensity is also adjusted.
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, a
chime will sound.
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. This could
result in loss of control and lead
to an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
OAE046167L/OAE046113L
■ Type B
■ Type A
OAEE046412
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
Gauges and meters
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or
miles per hour (MPH).
The speedometer for cluster type B
is displayed differently according to
the mode selected, ECO or SPORT.
If the shift lever is in S (Sport),
SPORT mode is selected and if the
shift lever is in D (Drive), ECO mode
is selected.
For more information, refer to “Dual
Clutch Transmission” in chapter 5.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approx-
imate number of engine revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
NOTICE
OAE046102
OAE046103
■ Type A
■ Type B
• ECO mode selected
OAE046104
■ Type B
• SPORT mode selected
OAE046106
■ Type B
• SPORT mode selected
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power gauge
The power gauge indicates whether
the current driving condition is fuel
efficient or not.
• CHARGE :
Shows that the energy made by the
vehicle is being converted to elec-
trical energy. (Regenerated energy)
• ECO :
Shows that the vehicle is being
driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
• POWER :
Shows that the vehicle is exceed-
ing the Eco-friendly range.
Information
Accordance to the power gauge area
the “EV” indicator comes on or off.
- “EV” indicator ON : Vehicle is driv-
en using the electric motor or the
gasoline engine is stopped.
- “EV” indicator OFF : Vehicle is
driven using the gasoline engine.
Fuel gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
i
OAEQ046008
OAE046107/OAE046108
■ Except Europe
• Type A
• Type B
■ For Europe
• Type A
• Type B
OAE046107L/OAE046108L
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire
damaging the catalytic converter.
Hybrid battery SOC
(State of Charge) gauge
This gauge indicates the remaining
hybrid battery power. If the SOC is
near the "0 or L (Low)" level, the
vehicle automatically operates the
engine to charge the battery.
However, if the Service Indicator
( ) and Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the
SOC gauge is near the "0 or L (Low)"
level, we recommend the vehicle be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
i
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the "0 or E
(Empty)" level.
WARNING
■ For Europe
■ Except Europe
OAEQ046009/OAEQ046009L
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Never try to start the vehicle if the
fuel tank is empty. In this condi-
tion, the engine cannot charge the
high voltage battery of the hybrid
system. If you try to start the vehi-
cle when the fuel is empty, the
high voltage battery will become
discharged and be damaged.
Outside temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures either in
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.
- Temperature range :
-40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not immediately change
like a general thermometer not to
distract the driver.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by:
- User Settings mode in the Cluster :
You can change the temperature
unit in the “Other Features -
Temperature unit” .
- Automatic climate control system :
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds or more.
The temperature unit of the instrument
cluster and climate control system will
change at once.
NOTICE
OAE046135/OAE046109
■ Type B
■ Type A
3-48
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
Distance to empty
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will
display "----" as distance to empty.
• The distance to empty for cluster
type B is displayed differently
according to the mode selected,
ECO or SPORT. If the shift lever is
in S (Sport), SPORT mode is
selected and if the shift lever is in D
(Drive), ECO mode is selected.
For more information, refer to “Dual
Clutch Transmission” in chapter 5.
• The Distance to Empty for cluster
type A is mentioned in “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.5 gallon) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAE046138/OAE046112
■ Type B
■ Type A
OAEE046141/OAE046126
■ Type B
• ECO mode selected
• SPORT mode selected
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
Dual clutch transmission shift
indicator
This indicator displays which shift
lever is selected.
Dual clutch transmission shift indi-
cator in Manual Shift mode
(for Europe, if equipped)
In the Manual Shift mode, this indi-
cator informs which gear is desired
while driving to save fuel.
- Shifting up :
▲
2,
▲
3,
▲
4,
▲
5,
▲
6
- Shifting down :
▼
1,
▼
2,
▼
3,
▼
4,
▼
5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or
1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th,
5th, or 6th gear).
When the system is not working
properly, the indicator is not dis-
played.
Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up indicates the current
gear position displayed in the cluster
for about 2 seconds when shifting
into other positions (P/R/N/D).
3
OAE046136L/OAE046110L
■ Type B
■ Type A
OAE046185/OAE046184
■ Type B
■ Type A
OAE046137/OAE046111
■ Type B
■ Type A
3-50
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning and indicator lights
Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situa-
tion that needs attention.
Ready Indicator
This indicator illuminates :
When the vehicle is ready to be driven.
- ON : Normal driving is possible.
- OFF : Normal driving is not possible,
or a problem has occurred.
- Blinking : Emergency driving.
When the ready indicator goes OFF
or blinks, there is a problem with the
system. In this case, we recommend
that you have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
EV Mode Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the
vehicle is driven by the electric motor.
Service Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a problem with the
hybrid vehicle control system or
hardware.
When the warning light illuminates
while driving, or does not go OFF
after starting the vehicle, we recom-
mend that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
EV
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 2.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
• When the regenerative brake does
not operate.
If the brake fluid level in the reser-
voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in
chapter 7). After adding brake
fluid, check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is
found, or if the warning light
remains on, or if the brakes do not
operate properly, do not drive the
vehicle. We recommend you to
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure is
required to stop the vehicle.
(red color)
3-52
Convenient features of your vehicle
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Regenerative Brake
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
When the regenerative brake does
not operate and the brake does not
perform well. This causes the Brake
Warning light (red) and Regenerative
Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu-
minate simultaneously.
In this case, drive safely and we rec-
ommend that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The operation of the brake pedal may
be more difficult than normal and the
braking distance can increase.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
- Electronic
Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, we recommend you have
the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
We recommend you have the
vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
3-54
Convenient features of your vehicle
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to
the emission control systems which
could affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-
ic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Charging System
Warning Light
When this warning light illuminates
while running the engine, the battery
is not being charged. Immediately
turn OFF all electrical accessories.
Try not to use electrically operated
controls, such as the power windows.
Keep running the engine.
We recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7).
If the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light is illumi-
nated, severe damage could
result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be seri-
ous engine damage or malfunc-
tion. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is
low, fill the engine oil to the
proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after the
engine is started, turn the
engine off immediately. In this
case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "0 or E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-56
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant temper-
ature is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
Overspeed Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• When you drive the vehicle more
than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime
also sounds for approximately 5
seconds.
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction in oper-
ation in any of the following systems:
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Smart cruise control malfunction
(if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS, if equipped)
- Service reminder
To identify the details of the warning,
look at the LCD display.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
120
km/h
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
This warning light remains ON
after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For more details, refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)”in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately
3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)”in chapter 5.
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
3-58
Convenient features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (without smart
key) (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in the key with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (with smart key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC or ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and the Engine Start/Stop button is
ON, but the vehicle cannot detect
the smart key.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery voltage of the
smart key is low.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the
Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key. (For more details,
refer to "Starting the Engine"
in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you operate the turn signal
indicator light.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.
- The turn signal indicator light illumi-
nates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light blinks
rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light does
not illuminate at all
If either of these conditions occur, we
recommend you to have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Low Beam Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Rear Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the rear fog lights are on.
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
Exterior Light Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When one of the exterior bulbs
(headlamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, etc.)
is not operating properly. One of the
bulbs may need to be replaced.
Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same
wattage rating.
Cruise
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Speed Limiter Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates
when:
• When the speed limiter is enabled.
i
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates
• When the driver moves the shift
lever to S (Sport).
For more details, refer to "Dual
Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.
ECO Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the driver moves the shift
lever to D (Drive).
For more details, refer to "Dual
Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.
Autonomous
Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the AEB system is turned
off.
• When the radar sensor or cover is
blocked with dirt or snow. Check
the sensor and cover and clean
them by using a soft cloth.
• When there is a malfunction with
AEB. In this case, we recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized dealer of HYUNDAI.
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
Indicator light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When the system operat-
ing conditions are satisfied for
LKAS.
• [White] When the system operat-
ing conditions are not satisfied or
when the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane keeping assist
system.
In this case, we recommend you
have your vehicle inspected by to
an authorized dealer of HYUNDAI.
For more information, refer to “Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS)” in
chapter 5.
3-62
LCD display messages
Shift to P
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to turn off the vehicle with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton once more, it will turn to the ON
position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the battery of the smart key is dis-
charged while changing the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF posi-
tion.
Press START button while turn-
ing wheel (for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not unlock
normally when the Engine Start/Stop
button is pressed.
You should press the Engine
Start/Stop button while turning the
steering wheel right and left.
Check Steering Wheel Lock
System (for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally while the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton changes to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button changes
to the ACC position twice by pressing
the button repeatedly without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
You can start the vehicle by depressing
the brake pedal.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine Start/Stop
button.
When attempting to start the vehicle,
always have the smart key with you.
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when you
press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Press START button again
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you
were unable to start the vehicle when
the Engine Start/Stop button was
pressed.
If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button again.
If the warning message appears
each time you press the Engine
Start/Stop button, we recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Press START button with key
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton while the warning message “Key
not detected” is displayed.
At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
You need to replace the fuse with a
new one before starting the engine.
If that is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the
ACC position.
Shift to P to start vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) position.
Door, Hood, Tailgate Open
This warning is displayed indicating
which door, or hood, or tailgate is
open.
3
OAE046165
Before driving the vehicle, you
should confirm that the door/
hood/tailgate is fully closed.
Also, check there is no door
/hood/tailgate open warning light
or message displayed on the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION
3-64
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the door/tailgate open warning is
blocked with another warning mes-
sage, an icon will appear on the top
of the LCD display.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
This warning is displayed if you turn
off the engine when the sunroof is
open.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the out-
side temperature gauge is approxi-
mately below 4°C (40°F), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks 10 times,
and then illuminates. Also, the warn-
ing chime sounds 1 time.
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
i
OAD045136
■ Type A
OAEE046114
■ Type B■ Type A
OAE046461L/OAE046099L
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Low Pressure (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corre-
sponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
This warning message is displayed if
the fuse switch located on the fuse
box under the steering wheel is OFF.
You should turn the fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses”
in chapter 7.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed
if the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
Have the washer fluid reservoir
refilled.
Low Fuel
This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Engine has overheated
This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
Lights Mode
■ Type B
■ Type A
OAE046114L/OAE046115L OLFH044149L
3-66
Convenient features of your vehicle
This indicator displays which exterior
light is selected using the lighting
control.
Wiper
This indicator displays which wiper
speed is selected using the wiper
control.
Check headlight (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the headlamps are not operating
properly. The headlamp bulb may
need to be replaced.
Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same wattage
rating.
i
■ For Europe■ Except Europe ■ For Europe■ Except Europe
OAE046117L/OAE046182L OAE046118L/OAE046183L OAD045142L
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Parking assist system malfunc-
tion (if equipped)
This warning is displayed if there is a
problem with the Parking Assist
System. We recommend you to have
the vehicle inspected by an author-
ized dealer of HYUNDAI.
For more information, refer to
“Driver Assist System” in chapter 3.
Check Active Air Flap System
This warning message is displayed
in the following situations:
- There is a malfunction with the
actuator flap
- There is a malfunction with the
actuator air flap controller
- The air flap does not open
When all of the above conditions are
fixed, the warning will disappear.
Check Hybrid system
This warning message is displayed
when there is a problem with the
hybrid control system.
Refrain from driving when the warn-
ing message is displayed.
In this case, we recommend that you
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
■ Front and rear■ Rear
OAE046462L/OAEE046116
OLFH044262L OLFH044248L
3-68
Check Hybrid system.
Turn off engine.
This warning message is displayed
when there is a problem with the
hybrid system. The " " indicator
will blink and a warning chime will
sound until the problem is solved.
In this case, we recommend that you
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check Hybrid system.
Do not start engine.
This warning message is displayed
when the hybrid battery power
(SOC) level is low. A warning chime
will sound until the problem is solved.
In this case, we recommend that you
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stop vehicle and check power
supply
This warning message is displayed
when a failure occurs in the power
supply system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and recommend that
you tow your vehicle to the nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the vehicle inspected.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLFH044228L OLFH044240L OLFH044230L
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
Stop vehicle to charge battery
This warning message is displayed
when the hybrid battery power
(SOC) level is low.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and wait until the hybrid
battery is charged.
Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery
damage
This warning message is displayed
when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
You should refill the fuel tank to pre-
vent hybrid battery damage.
Refill inverter coolant
This warning message is displayed
when the inverter coolant is nearly
empty.
You should refill the inverter coolant.
3
OLFH044232L
OLFH044242L
OLFH044244L
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
Stop vehicle and check brakes
This warning message is displayed
when a failure occurs in the brake
system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and recommend that
you tow your vehicle to the nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the vehicle inspected.
Check brakes
This warning message is displayed
when the brake performance is low
or the regenerative brake does not
work properly due to a failure in the
brake system.
In this case, it may take longer for the
brake pedal to operate and the brak-
ing distance may become longer.
Check Virtual Engine Sound
System
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the Virtual
Engine Sound System (VESS).
In this case, we recommend that you
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLFH044234L OLFH044250L
OLFH044543L
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD display control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) , : MOVE switch for
changing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the select-
ed item
LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY
OAE046402
■
■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
CC
CC
3-72
Convenient features of your vehicle
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
SCC/LKAS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and
"Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
A/V
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information
This mode displays the service interval (mileage or days) and warning mes-
sages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
or or
LCD modes (for cluster type A)
The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Edit settings after shifting to P
This warning message appears if
you try to adjust the User Settings
while driving.
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and mov-
ing the shift lever to P (Park).
Quick guide (Help)
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the
OK button.
For more details about each sys-
tem, refer to this Owner’s Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including fuel economy,
trip meter information and vehicle
speed.
For more details, refer to "Trip
Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
OAE046463L
OTL045174
3-74
Convenient features of your vehicle
SCC/LKAS mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
For more information, refer to
"Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and
"Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS)" in chapter 5.
A/V mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Information mode
This mode displays the service inter-
val (mileage and days).
Service interval
Service in
It calculates and displays the mainte-
nance schedule (mileage or days),
as set in the system.
When the set mileages or days
passed, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
ignition switch is turned ON.
OAD055080N OTL045178
OTL045182L
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Service required
If you exceed the specified service
interval, a message indicating,
"Service required" will be displayed
each time you turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval in
mileages or days that you initially
set, press the OK button for more
than 1 second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Warning message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed in the
information mode for several seconds.
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Smart cruise control malfunction
(if equipped)
- Service reminder
i
OTL045297L OTL045299L
3-76
Convenient features of your vehicle
User settings mode
In this mode, you can change the
setting of the instrument cluster,
doors, lamps, etc.
1. Driving Assist
2. Door
3. Lights
4. Sound
5. Convenience
6. Service Interval
7. Other Features
8. Reset
The information provided differs
according to the items applied to your
vehicle.
1. Driving Assist
• Lane Keeping Assist System
- Lane Departure/Standard LKA/
Active LKA
To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane
Keeping Assist System.
For more information, refer to the
"Lane Keeping Assist System" in
chapter 5.
• Smart Cruise Control
- Response (Slow/Normal/Fast)
To adjust the sensitivity of the
Smart Cruise Control system.
For more information, refer to the
"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter 5.
• Forward Collision Warning
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
To activate or deactivate the AEB
system.
- Late/Normal/Early
To adjust the initial warning alert
time for Autonomous Emergency
Braking system.
For more information, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB)" in chapter 5.
• Rear Collision Warning
- Rear Cross Traffic Alert
To activate or deactivate the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert system.
- Blind Spot Detection Sound
To activate or deactivate the Blind
Spot Detection sound.
For more information, refer to “Blind
Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
2. Door
• Auto Lock
- Disable: The auto door lock opera-
tion will be canceled.
- Enable on Speed: All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehi-
cle speed exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
- Enable on Shift: All doors will be
automatically locked if the automat-
ic transmission shift lever is shifted
from the P (Park) position to the R
(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
• Auto Unlock
- Disable: The auto door unlock oper-
ation will be canceled.
- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the
Engine Start/Stop button is set to
the OFF position. (if equipped with
smart key)
- On Key Out: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the igni-
tion key is removed from the igni-
tion switch. (if equipped with remote
key)
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked if the automatic
transmission shift lever is shifted to
the P (Park) position.
• Horn Feedback (if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the horn
feedback.
If the horn feedback is activated,
after locking the door by pressing the
lock button on the remote key, and
pressing it again within 4 seconds,
the horn feedback sound will operate
once to indicate that all doors are
locked.
3. Lights
• One Touch Turn Signal
- Off: The one touch turn signal func-
tion will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-
cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter.
• Headlamp Delay
To activate or deactivate the head-
lamp delay function.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter
4. Sound
• Park Assist System Volume
- Level 1~3
To adjust the Park Assist System
volume.
5. Convenience
• Seat Easy Access
- Off: The seat easy access function
is deactivated.
- Normal/Extended: When you turn
off the engine, the driver's seat will
automatically move rearward short
(Normal) or long (Extended) for you
to enter or exit the vehicle more
comfortably.
For more information, refer to
"Driver Position Memory System"
in this chapter.
• Wireless Charging System
To activate or deactivate the wireless
charging system in the front seat.
For more information, refer to
"Wireless Charging System" in
this chapter.
• Wiper/Lights Display
To activate or deactivate the Wiper/
Light mode.
When activated, the LCD display
shows the selected Wiper/Light
mode whenever you change the
mode.
• Gear Position Pop-up
To activate or deactivate the gear
position pop-up.
When activated, the gear position
will be displayed on the LCD display.
6. Service Interval
• Service Interval
To activate or deactivate the service
interval function.
3-78
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Adjust Interval
If the service interval menu is acti-
vated, you may adjust the time and
distance.
Information
To use the service interval menu, con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the service interval is activated and
the time and distance is adjusted,
messages are displayed in the fol-
lowing situations each time the vehi-
cle is turned on.
- Service in
: Displayed to inform the driver the
remaining mileage and days to
service.
- Service required
: Displayed when the mileage and
days to service has been reached
or passed.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
7. Other Features
• Fuel Economy Auto Reset
- Off: The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever
refueling.
- After Ignition: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
whenever it has passed 4 hours
after turning OFF the engine.
- After Refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
when refueling.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
• Fuel Economy Unit
To select the fuel economy unit.
(km/L, L/100, MPG)
• Temperature Unit
To select the temperature unit.
(°C,°F)
• Tire Pressure Unit
To select the tire pressure unit.
(psi, kPa, bar)
• Language
To select language.
8. Reset
You can reset the menus in the User
Settings Mode. All menus in the User
Settings Mode are initialized, except
language and service interval.
i
i
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
Assist
• This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane Keeping
Assist System (LKAS).
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane
Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.
• This mode displays information related to Tire Pressure.
For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
"
in
chapter 6.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Warning This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.
The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.
LCD modes (for cluster type B)
3-80
Convenient features of your vehicle
Edit settings after shifting to P
This warning message appears if
you try to adjust the User Settings
while driving.
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and mov-
ing the shift lever to P (Park).
Quick guide help
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the
OK button.
For more information about each
system, refer to this Owner’s
Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including fuel economy,
trip meter information and vehicle
speed.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
OAE046132L OAE046121L
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
Assist mode
SCC/LKAS
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
For more information, refer to
"Smart Cruise Control (SCC)“and
“Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS)” in chapter 5.
Tire Pressure
This mode displays information relat-
ed to Tire Pressure.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)“ in chapter 6.
OAE046133 OAEE046137
OAE066030L
3-82
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning mode
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed in the
information mode for several seconds.
- Lower washer fluid ((if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction
- Smart cruise control malfunction
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
User settings mode
In this mode, you can change the
setting of the instrument cluster,
doors, lamps, etc.
1. Driving Assist
2. Door
3. Lights
4. Sound
5. Convenience
6. Service Interval
7. Other Features
8. Reset
The information provided differs
according to the items applied to your
vehicle.
1. Driving Assist
• Lane Keeping Assist System
- Lane Departure/Standard LKA/Active
LKA
To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane
Keeping Assist System.
For more information, refer to the
"Lane Keeping Assist System" in
chapter 5.
• Smart Cruise Control Response
- Slow/Normal/Fast
To adjust the sensitivity of the
Smart Cruise Control system.
For more information, refer to the
"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter
5.
• Autonomous Emergency Braking
To activate or deactivate the Autonomous
Emergency Braking (AEB).
For more information, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB)" in chapter 5.
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Forward Collision Warning
- Late/Normal/Early
To adjust the initial warning alert
time for Autonomous Emergency
Braking system.
For more information, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB)" in chapter 5.
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert
To activate or deactivate the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert system.
For more information, refer to
“Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
• Blind Spot Detection Sound
To activate or deactivate the Blind
Spot Detection sound.
For more information, refer to “Blind
Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
2. Door
• Automatically Lock
- Disable: The auto door lock opera-
tion will be canceled.
- Enable on Speed: All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehi-
cle speed exceeds 15km/h
(9.3mph).
- Enable on Shift: All doors will be
automatically locked if the automat-
ic transmission shift lever is shifted
from the P (Park) position to the R
(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
• Automatically Unlock
- Disable: The auto door unlock oper-
ation will be canceled.
- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the
Engine Star/Stop button is set to
the OFF position. (if equipped with
smart key)
- On Key Out: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the igni-
tion key is removed from the igni-
tion switch. (if equipped with remote
key)
- Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be
automatically unlocked when the
driver’s door is unlocked.
- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked if the automatic
transmission shift lever is shifted to
the P (Park) position.
• Horn Feedback (if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the horn
feedback.
If the horn feedback is activated,
after locking the door by pressing the
lock button on the remote key, and
pressing it again within 4 seconds,
the horn feedback sound will operate
once to indicate that all doors are
locked.
3-84
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Lights
• One Touch Turn Signal
- Off: The one touch turn signal func-
tion will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-
cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter.
• Headlamp Delay
To activate or deactivate the head-
lamp delay function.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter
4. Sound
• Park Assist System Volume
- Softer/Louder
To adjust the Park Assist System
volume.
5. Convenience
• Seat Easy Access
- Off: The seat easy access function
is deactivated.
- Normal/Extended: When you turn
off the engine, the driver's seat will
automatically move rearward short
(Normal) or long (Extended) for you
to enter or exit the vehicle more
comfortably.
For more information, refer to
"Driver Position Memory System"
in this chapter.
• Wireless Charging System
To activate or deactivate the wireless
charging system in the front seat.
For more information, refer to
"Wireless Charging System" in
this chapter.
• Wiper/Lights Display
To activate or deactivate the Wiper/
Light mode.
When activated, the LCD display
shows the selected Wiper/Light
mode whenever you changed the
mode.
• Gear Position Pop-up
To activate or deactivate the gear
position pop-up.
When activated, the gear position
will be displayed on the LCD display.
6. Service Interval
• Service Interval
To activate or deactivate the service
interval function.
• Adjust Interval
If the service interval menu is acti-
vated, you may adjust the time and
distance.
Information
To use the service interval menu, con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the service interval is activated and
the time and distance is adjusted,
messages are displayed in the fol-
lowing situations each time the vehi-
cle is turned on.
- Service in
: Displayed to inform the driver the
remaining mileage and days to
service.
- Service required
: Displayed when the mileage and
days to service has been reached
or passed.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
7. Other Features
• Fuel Economy Auto Reset
- Off: The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever
refueling.
- After Ignition: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
whenever it has passed 4 hours
after turning OFF the engine.
- After Refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
when refueling.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
• Fuel Economy Unit
To select the fuel economy unit.
(km/L, L/100, MPG)
• Temperature Unit
To select the temperature unit.
(°C,°F)
• Tire Pressure Unit
To select the tire pressure unit.
(psi, kPa, bar)
• Language
To select language.
8. Reset
You can reset the menus in the User
Settings Mode. All menus in the User
Settings Mode are initialized, except
language and service interval.
i
3-86
Convenient features of your vehicle
T
TRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, toggle the
“ , ” switch on the steering wheel.
i
• Tripmeter
• Average Vehicle Speed
• Elapsed Time
• Distance to Empty
(Only for cluster type A)
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
Digital Speedometer
Driving Style
Energy Flow
Engine Coolant Temperature
(Only for cluster type B)
OAE046402
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
CC
CC
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Distance to empty/
Average fuel economy/
Instant fuel economy
Distance to Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will
display "----" as distance to empty.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (2
gallon) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average fuel economy
is displayed.
Automatic reset
To automatically reset the average fuel
economy after refueling, select the
"After Refueling" mode in User
Settings menu on the LCD display
(Refer to "LCD Display" in this
chapter).
Under "After Refueling" mode, the
average fuel economy will be
cleared to zero (----), when driving
speed exceeds 1 km/h, after adding
6 liters (2 gallons) of fuels or more.
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalcu-
lated.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instanta-
neous fuel economy while driving.
i
i
OAE046465L/OAE046464L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/
Elapsed time
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
OK button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the OK button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second when
the average vehicle speed is dis-
played.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 300 meters (0.19 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds,
after resetting the vehicle speed.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
counted while the engine is still run-
ning (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
i
i
OAE046463L/OAE046121L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Digital speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (km/h, MPH).
Driving Info display
At the end of each driving cycle, the
Driving Info message is displayed.
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2), and
the remaining distance to empty (3).
This information is displayed for a few
seconds when you turn off the igni-
tion, and then goes off automatically.
The information is calculated for each
ignition cycle.
If the estimated remaining vehicle
range is below 1 km (1 mi.), the dis-
tance to empty will display as "----" and
a "Low Fuel" warning message (4) will
be displayed.
Information
If sunroof open warning is displayed
in the cluster, the Driving Info mes-
sage will not be displayed.
i
OAE046146/OAE046147
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD045163L
■ Type A
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Driving style
The driving style is displayed when
you are driving in ECO mode.
When you drive in SPORT mode,
each driving category will be dis-
played with “--”.
Energy flow
The hybrid system informs the driv-
ers its energy flow in various operat-
ing modes. While driving, the current
energy flow is specified in 11 modes.
For more information, refer to HEV
Energy Flow in the “Hybrid System
Overview” provided in front of the
owner’s manual.
Engine coolant temperature
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
engine is running.
When the gauge indicator gets out
of the normal range, toward the “H
(Hot)” position, it indicates over-
heating of the engine. It may dam-
age the engine.
Do not continue driving with the
overheated engine. For further
information, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in the chapter 6.
NOTICE
OAE046148L/OAE046124L
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046125L
■ Type B
OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Exterior lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF (O) position
(2) AUTO light position
(3) Position lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
AUTO light position
When the light switch is in the AUTO
position, the position lamp and head-
lamp will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleanser
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor oper-
ation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
NOTICE
LLIIGGHHTT
OAE046448L
OAE046449L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046450L
OAE046451L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-92
Convenient features of your vehicle
Position lamp position ( )
The position lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, position lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel
lamp are turned ON.
Information
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
i
OAE046468L
OAE046469L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046466L
OAE046467L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046452L
OAE046453L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
Turn signals and lane change
signals
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A). To signal a lane
change, move the turn signal lever
slightly and hold it in position (B).
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver's vision.
WARNING
OAE046454L
OAE046455L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046456L
OAE046457L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released or when the turn
is completed.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch turn signal function
To activate an one-touch turn signal
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times.
You can activate/deactivate the One
Touch Turn Signal function or choose
the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7)
from the User Settings Mode on the
LCD display. For more details, refer
to "LCD Display" in this chapter.
Rear fog lamp (if equipped)
To turn on the rear fog lamp:
Position the light switch in the head-
lamp position, and then turn the light
switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.
To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one
of the following:
• Turn off the headlamp switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog
lamp position again.
OAE046458L
OAE046459L
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the position lamp when the
driver turns the engine off and opens
the driver-side door.
With this feature, the position lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the position lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If you place the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lamps ON, the headlamps (and/or
position lamps) remain on for about 5
minutes. However, with the engine off
if the driver’s door is opened and
closed, the headlamps (and/or posi-
tion lamps) are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlamps (and/or position
lamps) can be turned off by pressing
the lock button on the remote key or
smart key twice or turning the light
switch to the OFF or AUTO position.
However, if you turn the light switch
to the AUTO position when it is dark
outside, the headlamps will not be
turned off.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode on the LCD dis-
play. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver's door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically. Therefore, It
causes the battery to be dis-
charged. In this case, make sure to
turn off the lamp before getting out
of the vehicle.
Daytime running light (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL system will turn the dedi-
cated lamp OFF when:
1. The headlights are in the ON posi-
tion.
2. The engine is turned off.
NOTICE
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
Headlight leveling device
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the pas-
sengers and loading weight in the
luggage area, turn the beam leveling
switch.
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight
beam level. Always keep the head-
light beam at the proper leveling
position, or headlights may dazzle
other road users.
Listed below are the examples of
proper switch settings. For loading
conditions other than those listed
below, adjust the switch position so
that the beam level may be the near-
est as the condition obtained accord-
ing to the list.
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number
of passengers and loading weight in
the luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
OAE046408
Loading condition
Switch
position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers (including driver) 1
Full passengers (including driver)
+ Maximum permissible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permissible
loading
3
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined
backward according to passen-
ger's posture, or the headlight
beam is irradiated to the high or
low position, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
WARNING
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Welcome system (if equipped)
Welcome light (if equipped)
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and tailgate) are
closed and locked, the puddle lamp
will come on for about 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed with the
smart key in possession.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
(if equipped)
Also, if the outside rearview mirror
folding switch is in the AUTO position,
the outside rearview mirror will unfold
automatically.
Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and tailgate) are
closed and locked, the door handle
lamp will come on for about 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or smart
key.
• When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed with the smart
key in possession.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Headlamp and position lamp
When the headlamp (lamp switch in the
headlamp or AUTO position) is on and
all doors (and tailgate) are locked and
closed, the position lamp and head-
lamp will come on for 15 seconds if/or
any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or smart
key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the position lamp and
headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
tailgate) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
OAE046409
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
Interior lights
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off or the battery will dis-
charge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors closed. If a door is opened, the
lamp will go off 40 minutes after the
engine is turned off. If the doors are
locked by the remote key or smart
key and the vehicle enters the armed
stage of the theft alarm system, the
lamps will go off five seconds later.
Front lamps
(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Door Lamp
(3) Front Room Lamp
Front Map Lamp :
Press either of these lens to turn the
map lamp on or off. This light pro-
duces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night or as a
personal lamp for the driver and the
front passenger.
NOTICE
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined back-
ward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
WARNING
OAD045405
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Front Door Lamp ( ):
The front or rear room lamps come on
when the front or rear doors are
opened if the engine is running or not.
When doors are unlocked by the
remote key or smart key, the front and
rear lamps come on for approximate-
ly 30 seconds as long as any door is
not opened. The front and rear room
lamps go out gradually after approxi-
mately 30 seconds if the door is
closed. However, if the ignition switch
is in the ON position or all doors are
locked, the front and rear lamps will
turn off. If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC position or
the OFF position, the front and rear
lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.
Front room lamp
•:
Press the button to turn ON the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
Re-press the button to turn OFF
the room lamp.
•:
Press the button to turn OFF the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
Rear lamps
Rear Room Lamp Switch ( ):
Press this button to turn the room
lamp on and off.
Do not leave the lamp switches on
for an extended period of time
when the engine is turned off.
Tailgate room lamp
The tailgate room lamp comes on
when the tailgate is opened.
The tailgate lamp comes on as
long as the tailgate lid is open. To
prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the tailgate lid
securely after using the tailgate.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE046418
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE046445
OAEE046421
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
Vanity mirror lamp
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or dam-
age the sunvisor.
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
Welcome light
When all doors (and tailgate) are
closed and locked, the puddle lamp
will come on for 15 seconds if the
door is unlocked by the remote
key/smart key or outside door handle
button.
For more details, refer to
"Welcome System" in this chapter.
Escort light
When the ignition switch is in the
LOCK/OFF position and the driver's
door is opened, the puddle lamp will
come on for 30 seconds. If the dri-
ver's door is closed within the 30
seconds, the puddle lamp will turn off
after 15 seconds. If the driver's door
is closed and locked, the puddle
lamp will turn off immediately.
The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will
turn on only the first time the driver's
door is opened after the engine is
turned off.
NOTICE
OAD045410 OAE046419
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST /
V
– Single wipe
· OFF / O – Off
· AUTO* – Auto control wipe
INT / --- – Intermittent wipe
· LO / 1 – Low wiper speed
· HI / 2 – High wiper speed
* : if equipped
B : Auto control wipe time adjust-
ment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
MIST (
V
) : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward (or
downward) and release.
The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
OFF (O) : Wiper is not in operation.
INT (---) : Wiper operates intermit-
tently at the same wiping
intervals.To vary the speed
setting, turn the speed
control knob (B).
AUTO : The rain sensor located on
the upper end of the wind-
shield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and con-
trols the wiping cycle for the
proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain
stops, the wiper stops.To
vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (B).
WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS
OAD045437L
OAD045438L
■ Left-hand drive
• Type A
• Type B
OAD045437R
■ Right-hand drive
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
LO (1) : The wiper runs at a lower
speed.
HI (2) : The wiper runs at a higher
speed.
Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the wiper will oper-
ate once to perform a self-check of
the system. Set the wiper to OFF
position when the wiper is not in use.
• When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF (O)
position to stop the auto wiper
operation. The wiper may oper-
ate and be damaged if the switch
is set in the AUTO mode while
washing the vehicle.
• Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
OAD045441L
Sensor
To avoid personal injury from
the windshield wipers, when the
engine is running and the wind-
shield wiper switch is placed in
the AUTO mode:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
WARNING
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until you
release the lever. If the washer does
not work, you may need to add wash-
er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.
OAD045404
When the outside temperature is
below freezing, ALWAYS warm
the windshield using the
defroster to prevent the washer
fluid from freezing on the wind-
shield and obscuring your vision
which could result in an accident
and serious injury or death.
WARNING
• To prevent possible damage
to the washer pump, do not
operate the washer when the
fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers and washer sys-
tem, use anti-freezing washer
fluids in the winter season or
cold weather.
CAUTION
3-104
Rear view camera (if equipped)
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
This is a supplemental system that
provides a view of the area behind
the vehicle through the A/V display
while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse)
position.
Information
Always keep the camera lens clean. The
camera may not work normally if the
lens is covered with dirt or snow.
i
DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
Convenient features of your vehicle
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
OAE046407L
OAE046406
Do not use any cleanser con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents when cleaning the lens.
Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water.
CAUTION
• Never rely solely on the rear
camera display when backing-
up.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
WARNING
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Rear parking assist system
(if equipped)
The Rear Parking Assist System
assists the driver during reverse move-
ment of the vehicle by chiming if any
object is sensed within approximately
120 cm (50 in) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Rear Parking
Assist System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
in the ON position. However, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3
mph), the system may not detect
objects.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10
km/h (6 mph), the system will not
warn you even though objects are
detected.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound and indicator
OAE046403
Sensor
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is approximately
60 to 120 cm (24 to 47 in) from
the rear bumper, the warning
sound beeps intermittently.
When an object is approximately
30 to 60 cm (12 to 24 in) from
the rear bumper, the warning
sound beeps more frequently.
When an object is within approx-
imately 30 cm (12 in) from the
rear bumper, the warning sound
beeps continuously.
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
• The indicator may differ from the
illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks, we
recommend that you have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not
sound or if the buzzer sounds
intermittently when shifting into R
(Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction with the
Parking Assist System. If this
occurs, we recommend that you
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
To turn off the Rear Parking
Assist System (if equipped)
Push the button to turn off the Rear
Parking Assist System. The indicator
light on the button will turn on.
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
The Rear Parking Assist System
may not operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of the Rear
Parking Assist System malfunction
when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or acces-
sories have been installed, or if the
vehicle bumper height or sensor
installation has been modified.
NOTICE
OAE046405L
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is extreme-
ly hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 inches) and narrower than
14 cm (6 inches) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not operate consistently in
some circumstances depending on
the speed of the vehicle and the
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm (15 in)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is blocked with
snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the rear
parking assist system may be inop-
erative until the snow or ice melts,
or the debris is removed. Use a
soft cloth to wipe debris away from
the sensor.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Doing so may
cause the sensors to fail to operate
normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a Rear
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Assist System
(if equipped)
The Parking Assist System assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within approximately 100 cm
(40 in) in front and 120 cm (47 in)
behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Parking Assist
System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
Parking Assist System button is
pressed with the engine running.
• The Parking Assist System button
turns on automatically and acti-
vates the Parking Assist System
when you move the shift lever to
the R (Reverse) position. However,
if the vehicle speed exceeds 10
km/h (6 mph), the system will not
warn you even though objects are
detected, and if the vehicle speed
exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph), the
system will turn off automatically.
OAE046404
OAE046403
■ Front sensor
■ Rear sensor
Sensors
Sensor
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
OAE046405
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To turn on the system, press the
Parking Assist System button.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
61 ~ 100
(24 ~39)
Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
61 ~ 120
(24 ~47)
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
31 ~ 60
(12 ~24)
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30
(12)
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
• The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction with the Parking Assist System. If this occurs, we rec-
ommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
Types of warning sound and indicator
cm (in)
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
Parking Assist System may not
operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of Parking
Assist System malfunction when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed, or
if the vehicle bumper height or sen-
sor installation has been modified.
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Parking assist system precau-
tions
• The parking assist system may not
operate consistently in some cir-
cumstances depending on the
speed of the vehicle and the
shapes of the objects detected.
• The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-fac-
tory installed equipment or acces-
sories may also interfere with the
sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm (15 in)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is blocked with
snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the park-
ing assist system may be inopera-
tive until the snow or ice melts, or
the debris is removed. Use a soft
cloth to wipe debris away from the
sensor.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Doing so may
cause the sensors to fail to operate
normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
Information
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this
chapter.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the cen-
ter facia switch panel. The indicator
on the rear window defroster but-
ton illuminates when the defroster
is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the OFF position.
i
i
NOTICE
OAE046301
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
A
AUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
OAE046300L/OAE046300R
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. Passenger’s temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. OFF button
5. Front windshield defrost button
6. Rear window defrost button
7. Air conditioning button
8. Air intake control button
9. Fan speed control button
10. Mode selection button
11. Driver only button
12. SYNC button
13. Climate control information screen
■■
Left-hand drive
■■
Right-hand drive
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
Information
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience, use the
AUTO button and set the tempera-
ture to 23°C (73°F).
i
OAE046303
OAE046302
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Never place anything near the sensor
to ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this
case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed. When pressing any button except
the AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1.Start the engine.
2.Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
i
OAE046304
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
OAE046306
OAE046306R
■■
Left-hand drive
■■
Right-hand drive
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OAE046305
OAE046307
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed ( ) using the vent control
lever.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
OAE046308
OAE046309
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
OAE046310
■ Driver’s side ■ Front passenger’s side
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust
the driver and passenger side tem-
perature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature
control knob. The driver and pas-
senger side temperature will be
adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control knob to adjust the driv-
er side temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control knob to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
Temperature unit conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
This is a normal condition. You can
switch the temperature mode between
Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;
- Automatic climate control system
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change
from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or
from Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
- “User setting mode” in the cluster:
You can change the temperature
unit in the “Other features -
Temperature unit”
OAE046311
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
i
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING
OAE046312
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pushing the fan
speed control button.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
Driver Only
If you press the DRIVER ONLY but-
ton( ) and the indicator light
illuminates, cold air mostly blows in
the direction of the driver’s seat.
However, some of the cold air may
come out of other seats’ ducts to
keep indoor air pleasant.
If you use the button with no passen-
ger in the front passenger seat, ener-
gy consumption will be reduced.
DRIVER ONLY button will be turned
off under the following conditions:
1) Defrost on
2) SYNC on
3) Adjusted front passenger seat
temperature
4) DRIVER ONLY button re-push
DRIVER
ONLY
NOTICE
OAE046313 OAE046314
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
OAE046315 OAE046316
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with R-134a or R1234yf
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Information
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regulation
in your country at the time of produc-
tion. You can find out which air condi-
tioning refrigerant is applied to your
vehicle on the label located inside of
the hood.
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or sal-
vaged vehicle and new replace-
ment MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
NOTICE
i
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine
overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air condi-
tioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to elec-
trical equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the win-
dows closed.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
i
3-124
Convenient features of your vehicle
System maintenance
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
i
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
ODH044365R
ODH043366
■ Example
• Type B
• Type A
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
You can find out which air condition-
ing refrigerant is applied to your vehi-
cle on the label located inside of the
hood.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and com-
pressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with
R-1234yf
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflam-
mable at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and
certified technicians.
It is important that the
correct type and amount of oil
and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause dam-
age to the vehicle and personal
injury.
WARNING
3-126
Convenient features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up inside of the wind-
shield.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed will
be selected automatically.
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
lower speed.
WARNING
OAE046317
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh)
air position and higher fan speed are
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button or knob manu-
ally.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is controlled to higher fan
speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is controlled to higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times. It indicates
that the defogging logic is canceled
or returned to the programmed sta-
tus.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OAE046318
3-128
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
Information
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside
temperature is below -10 °C.
When the Auto Defogging
System operates, the indi-
cator will illuminate.
If higher level of moisture are sensed
in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging
System will operate in the following
order:
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
If the air conditioning is off or recircu-
lated air position is manually selected
while Auto Defogging System is ON,
the Auto Defogging System Indicator
will blink 3 times to signal that the
manual operation has been canceled.
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
When the Auto Defogging System is
canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink
3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-
played on the climate control infor-
mation screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
times without a signal.
Information
• When the air conditioning is turned
on by Auto defogging system, if you
try to turn off the air conditioning, the
indicator will blink 3 times and the air
conditioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recircu-
lated air position while Auto defog-
ging system is operating.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
i
OAE046320
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Clean air (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system operates,
the outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically for ventilating the
car. Then, if you select the recirculat-
ed air position, the outside (fresh) air
will be selected automatically after 3
minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the pas-
senger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
WARNING
SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
Center console storage
To open :
Press the button (1).
Glove box
To open:
Pull the lever (1).
NOTICE
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
ALWAYS keep the storage com-
partment covers closed secure-
ly while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
of the compartment and may
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
WARNING
OAE046420 OAE046421
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
Multi box (if equipped)
Use the multi box to keep small
objects.
OAD045413
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
WARNING
OAE046470L
Do not keep objects that can be
thrown from the multi box and
severely injure passengers in
the vehicle in the event of a sud-
den stop or an accident.
WARNING
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
I
INNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean the ashtray:
The plastic receptacle should be
removed by lifting the plastic ashtray
receptacle upward after turning the
cover counterclockwise and pulling it
out.
Cup holder
Front
Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.
Rear
Pull the armrest down to use the cup
holders.
OAE046471L
Ashtray use
Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
WARNING
OAE046424
■ Front
■ Rear
OAE046423
• Avoid abrupt starting and
braking when the cup holder
is in use to prevent spilling
your drink. If hot liquid spills,
you could be burned. Such a
burn to the driver could cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
vehicle is in motion. Injuries
may result in the event of sud-
den stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.
WARNING
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
Sunvisor
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Use the ticket holder (4) to hold tick-
ets.
Information
Close the vanity mirror cover securely
and return the sunvisor to its original
position after use.
Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the ticket
holder.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a hot vehicle. It may
explode.
WARNING
OAE046425
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
WARNING
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 180
W(Watt) with the engine running.
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the battery
to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 180 W(Watt) in
electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet.These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electri-
cal/electronic devices with
reverse current protection. The
current from the battery may
flow into the vehicle's electri-
cal/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
NOTICE
OAE046426
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
WARNING
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
USB charger
The USB charger is located inside
the console box between the driver’s
seat and the front passenger’s seat.
Insert the USB charger into the USB
port, and re-charge a smart phone or
a tablet PC.
• A charging status/charging com-
pletion message is displayed on a
screen of a smart phone or a tablet
PC.
• A smart phone or a tablet PC may
get warmer during the re-charging
process. It does not indicate any mal-
function with the charging system.
• A smart phone or a tablet PC,
which adopts a different re-charg-
ing method, may not be properly
re-charged. In this case, use an
exclusive charger of your device.
• The charging terminal is only to re-
charge a device. Do not use the
charging terminal either to turn ON
an audio or to play media on the
AVN.
Wireless cellular phone charg-
ing system (if equipped)
There is a wireless cellular phone
charging inside the front console.
The system is available when all
doors are closed, and when the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC/ON position.
To charge a cellular phone
The wireless cellular phone charging
system charges only the Qi-enabled
cellular phones ( ). Read the label
on the cellular phone accessory
cover or visit your cellular phone
manufacturer’s website to check
whether your cellular phone supports
the Qi technology.
OAE046444
OAE046427
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
The wireless charging process starts
when you put a Qi-enabled cellular
phone on the wireless charging unit.
1. Remove other items, including the
smart key, from the wireless charg-
ing unit. If not, the wireless charg-
ing process may be interrupted.
2. The indicator illuminates in orange
during the charging process. The
indicator color changes to green,
when the charging process is
completed.
3. You can turn ON or OFF the wire-
less charging function in the user
settings mode on the instrument
cluster. (For further information,
refer to the “LCD Modes” in this
chapter.)
Slightly change the cellular phone
position, when the cellular phone is
not being charged. Make sure that
the indicator illuminates in orange.
The indicator color may not change
to green in accordance with the cel-
lular phone type, even though the
charging process is completed. The
indicator blinks in orange for 10 sec-
onds when there is a malfunction
with the wireless charging system.
In this case, temporarily stop the
charging process, and re-attempt to
wirelessly charge your cellular phone
again.
The system warns you with a mes-
sage on the LCD display when you do
not take out the cellular phone from
the wireless charging unit with the
front door open and the Engine
Start/Stop button in the OFF position.
• The wireless cellular phone
charging system may not sup-
port certain cellular phones,
which are not verified for the Qi
specification ( ).
• Locate your cell phone well in the
middle of the wireless cellular
phone charging system. Even
when your cell phone locates
slightly to one side, the charging
speed may decrease.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop, when a
smart key function operates (i.e.
starting the engine, opening the
doors, closing the doors).
• For certain cell phones, the indi-
cator color may not change to
green, even when the wireless
charging process is properly
completed.
• The wireless charging process may
temporarily stop, when tempera-
ture abnormally increases inside
the wireless cellular phone charg-
ing system. The wireless charging
process restarts, when tempera-
ture falls to a proper level.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop when there
is any metallic item, such as a
coin, between the wireless cellu-
lar phone charging system and a
cellular phone.
NOTICE
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
To use the cigarette lighter, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC or ON
position.
Push the cigarette lighter all the way
into its socket. When the element is
heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.)
may damage the socket or cause
electrical failure.
Clock
Vehicles with Audio system
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].
• Set time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
Vehicles with Navigation system
Select the Settings menu on the
Navigation system ➟ Select
[Date/Time].
• GPS time: Displays time according
to the received GNSS time.
• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24
hour.
NOTICE
Do not adjust the clock while
driving.You may lose your steer-
ing control and cause severe
personal injury or accidents.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after
it is already heated because it
will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it
to prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects
into the socket of the cigarette
lighter. It may damage the cig-
arette lighter.
WARNING
OAE046472L
3-138
Convenient features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To hang items, pull the hanger down.
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
OAE046429
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothe pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
WARNING
OAE046430
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to obtain a luggage net.
3
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
WARNING
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
CAUTION
OAE046431
Multimedia System
Multimedia system.................................................4-2
Aux, USB and iPod
®
®
port ................................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering wheel audio control .........................................4-3
Bluetooth
®®
Wireless Technology hands-free ..........4-4
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) ..................4-5
How vehicle radio works.................................................4-5
Audio (Without touch screen) .............................4-8
Feature of your audio......................................................4-9
Radio .................................................................................4-16
Media..................................................................................4-18
Phone .................................................................................4-32
Setup ..................................................................................4-40
Declaration of conformity ..................................4-42
CE for EU ..........................................................................4-42
NCC for Taiwan ................................................................4-43
4
4-2
Multimedia System
Information
• If you install an aftermarket HID
headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port
You can use an AUX port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to plug
in an USB and also in an iPod
®
port.
Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna
Roof antenna (Type A)
The roof antenna receives both AM
and FM broadcast signals.
Rotate the roof antenna in a counter-
clockwise direction to remove it.
Rotate it in a clockwise direction to
reinstall it.
i
OAE046439
i
MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM
OAE046481L
4-3
Multimedia System
4
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna,
it is important that it is fully
tightened and adjusted to the
upright position to ensure prop-
er reception.
Shark fin antenna (Type B)
The shark fin antenna receives
transmitted data. (for example:
AM/FM, DAB, GPS/ GNSS)
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a cleaner
or use a scraper to remove for-
eign deposits as this may cause
damage to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can degrade the receiving AM
and FM broadcast signals.
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control
switches are installed for your con-
venience.
OAE046437
OAE046474L
NOTICE
NOTICE
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
OAE046321L
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Move the VOLUME toggle switch
up to increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME toggle switch
down to decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch
is moved up or down and held for 0.8
second or more, it will function in the
following modes.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select switch. It will SEEK until you
release the switch.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW switch.
If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch
is moved up or down, it will function
in the following modes.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION UP/DOWN switch.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN switch.
MODE ( ) (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, Disc, or AUX.
MUTE ( ) (4)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button again to activate
the sound.
Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
OAE046440
OAE046447
i
NOTICE
4-4
Multimedia System
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
• Audio : For detailed information,
refer to “AUDIO” in this chapter.
• AVN : Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the man-
ual supplied separately.
Audio / Video / Navigation sys-
tem (AVN) (if equipped)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
How vehicle radio works
FM reception
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then received by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
OJF045308L
4-5
Multimedia System
4
4-6
Multimedia System
AM (MW, LW) reception
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature
of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstruc-
tions so that they can provide better
signal coverage.
FM radio station
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are eas-
ily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The
following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble :
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
¢¢¢
JBM004
OJF045310LOJF045309L
4-7
Multimedia System
4
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with the
audio equipment. In such a case, use
the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must be
fitted. When a cellular phone or a
radio set is used with an internal
antenna alone, it may interfere
with the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem and adversely affect safe
operation of the vehicle.
iPod
®
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by HYUNDAI is under
license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
NOTICE
OJF045311L
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING
4-8
Multimedia System
G2H4G0002EE
■ Type A
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
G2H4G0000EE
AAUUDDIIOO ((WWiitthh TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn))
Multimedia System
4-9
Multimedia System
4
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) LCD screen
• Tap the screen to select a button.
(2) POWER/VOL knob
• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.
(3) RADIO
• Start FM, AM or DAB* radio.
* if equipped
(4) MEDIA
• Select USB(iPod
®
), Bluetooth
®
Audio, AUX and My Music.
• Display the media menu when two
or more media are connected or
when the [MEDIA] button is
pressed in media mode.
(5) SEEK/TRACK
• Search for next station in FM or AM
radio mode.
• Search for next station in DAB*
radio mode.
• Change the current song in media
mode.
* if equipped
(6) RESET
• Shutdown and restart the system.
(7) PHONE
• Start Bluetooth
®
Phone mode.
(8) SETUP
• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System, Screensaver
and Display Off settings.
(9) TUNE knob
• Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list.
• Press to select an item.
4-10
Multimedia System
G2H4G0001EE/G2H4G0002EE
■ Type B
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
■ Type C
4-11
Multimedia System
4
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) LCD screen
• Tap the screen to select a button.
(2) POWER/VOL knob
• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.
(3) RADIO
• Start FM, AM.
(4) MEDIA
• Select Disc, USB(iPod
®
), Bluetooth
®
Audio, AUX and My Music.
• Display the media menu when two
or more media are connected or
when the [MEDIA] button is
pressed in media mode.
(5) SEEK/TRACK
• Search for next station in FM or AM
radio mode.
• Change the current song in media
mode.
(6) RESET
• Shutdown and restart the system.
(7) EJECT
• Eject the inserted disc.
(8) Disc slot
• Insert a disc.
(9) DISP
• Turn the display on or off.
4-12
Multimedia System
(10) PHONE
• Start Bluetooth
®
Phone mode.
(11) SETUP
• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System, Screensaver
and Display Off settings.
(12) TUNE knob
• Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list.
• Press to select an item.
■ Type C
■ Type B
4-13
Multimedia System
4
Multimedia System
Steering wheel remote control
❈ The actual features in the may dif-
fer from the illustration.
(1) MUTE
• Press to mute audio output.
(2) MODE
• Press the button to change the
mode in the following order: Radio
➟ Media.
• Press and hold the button to turn off.
(with Type B, Type C)
(3) VOLUME
• Press to adjust the volume.
(4) UP/DOWN
• Press the button in radio mode to
search Presets.
• Press and hold the button in radio
mode to search frequencies.
• Press the button in media mode to
change the current song.
• Press and hold the button in media
mode to quick search through
songs.
(5) CALL
• Pressing the button
- If not in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode or receiving a phone call.
First press: Display Dial Number
screen.
Second press: Automatically dis-
play the most recently Dialed
Call number.
Third press: Dial the phone num-
ber entered.
- Press in the Incoming Call notifi-
cation screen to accept the
phone call.
- Press in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode to switch to the waiting call.
• Pressing and holding the button
- If not in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode or receiving a phone call,
the most recently Dialed Call
number is dialed.
- Press in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode to transfer the call to your
cell phone.
- Press in cell phone mode to
switch to Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode.
(6) END
• Press in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode to end the phone call.
• Press in the incoming call screen
to reject the call.
4-14
Multimedia System
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunc-
tion. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to acci-
dents (fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to light-
ning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in park-
ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehi-
cle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the igni-
tion turned off could result in
battery discharge.
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-15
Multimedia System
4
• Operating the device while driv-
ing could lead to accidents due
to a lack of attention to external
surroundings. First park the
vehicle before operating the
device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external
sounds cannot be heard may
lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume set-
ting when turning the device on.
A sudden output of extreme vol-
ume upon turning the device on
could lead to hearing impair-
ment. (Adjust the volume to a
suitable levels before turning off
the device.)
• If you want to change the posi-
tion of device installation,
please inquire with your place of
purchase or service mainte-
nance center. Technical expert-
ise is required to install or dis-
assemble the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not oper-
ate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations
may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the device and
use a dry and smooth cloth.
Never use tough materials,
chemical cloths, or solvents
(alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.)
as such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
NOTICE
4-16
Multimedia System
Information on status icons
Icons showing audio status are shown
in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Radio
FM/AM (with RDS)
DAB (if equipped)
(1) Radio
Switch between FM, AM and DAB*.
* if equipped.
(2) List
View all available stations.
(3) Presets
View all presets.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
Switching between FM, AM and DAB*
• Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between
FM, AM and DAB*.
• Press the [Radio] on the screen to
switch between FM, AM and DAB*.
* if equipped
Searching stations
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
search stations.
Icon Description
Mute Mute engaged
Battery
Remaining battery life of
a connected Bluetooth
®
device
Handsfree +
Audio stream-
ing connection
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
call and audio stream-
ing available
Handsfree
connection
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
call available
Bluetaooth
®
audio streaming
Bluetooth
®
audio
streaming available
Downloading
contacts
Downloading contacts
through Bluetooth
®
wire-
less communications
Downloading
call history
Downloading call history
through Bluetooth
®
wire-
less communications
Line busy Phone call in progress
Mute mic
Mic muted during a
call (caller cannot
hear your voice)
Phone signal
strength
Display the phone signal
strength for a cell phone
connected by Bluetooth
®
4-17
Multimedia System
4
List
A list of all available stations in the
vehicle’s current location is dis-
played. Press the desired station.
Favourite stations can be saved to
[Presets] by pressing the [+].
Presets
Save up to 40 frequently used stations.
To listen to a preset, press the
desired station list.
Press and hold the desired slot from
1 through 40. This saves the current
station in the selected slot.
If the slot is empty, simply pressing
saves the station to the slot.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Traffic Announcement (TA): Enable
or disable Traffic Announcements.
• Scan: All available stations are
played for five seconds each.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
FM/AM (without RDS)
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM.
(2) Presets
View all presets.
(3) List
View all available stations.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
Switching between FM, AM
• Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between
FM, AM.
• Press the [Band] on the screen to
switch between FM, AM.
Searching stations
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
search stations.
List
A list of all available stations in the
vehicle’s current location is dis-
played. Press the desired station.
Favourite stations can be saved to
[Presets] by pressing the [save].
4-18
Multimedia System
Presets
Save up to 40 frequently used stations.
To listen to a preset, press the
desired station list.
Press and hold the desired slot from
1 through 40. This saves the current
station in the selected slot.
If the slot is empty, simply pressing
saves the station to the slot.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Scan: All available stations are
played for five seconds each.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Media
Information
- Using the Discs
• This device has been manufactured
to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back
in its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances
could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and play-
ing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
as used by the user.
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result
in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as con-
tinued use may result in malfunc-
tions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CDRW
Drive Software.
(Continued)
i
4-19
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Copy-protected CDs such as Stype
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still oper-
ate but will do so abnormally.)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagonshaped)
as such discs could lead to malfunc-
tions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds,
the disc will automatically be re-
inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CDR,
CDs with labels)
Disc CD (Type B, Type C)
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button and
select [Disc CD].
• When a disc is inserted in the
audio system, disc playback
begins automatically.
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast-forward the
song that is currently playing.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to view a list of songs
available to play.
Select and play the desired song.
4-20
Multimedia System
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The song
that is currently playing is repeated.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in a
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu] and select the
desired function.
• Information: Detailed information
on the song that is currently play-
ing is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed
Information
- Using MP3
Supported audio formats
File formats other than the formats
above may not be recognized or
playable. Information such as file-
name may not be displayed.
Range of supported compressed file
types
1. Bitrate range (Kbps)
BIT RATE(kbps)
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
Layer3
High Range
32 8 8 48
40 16 16 64
48 24 24 80
56 32 32 96
64 40 40 128
80 48 48 160
96 56 56 192
112 64 64
128 80 80
160 96 96
192 112 112
224 128 128
256 144 144
320 160 160
NOTICE
File System
ISO 9660 Level 1
ISO 9660 Level 2
Romeo / Juliet (128 characters)
Compressed
audio formats
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X
& 8.X
i
4-21
Multimedia System
4
2. Sampling frequency (Hz)
• The sound quality of MP3/WMA
compressed files may vary depend-
ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate
can have better sound quality.)
• The product only recognizes files
with the MP3 or WMA extension.
Files without one of these exten-
sions are not recognized.
3. Number of recognizable folders
and files
• Folders: 2,000 for USB
• Files: 6,000 for USB
• No recognition limit for folder hier-
archies
4. Character display range (Unicode)
• Filenames: Up to 64 English char-
acters (64 Korean characters)
• Foldername: Up to 32 English
characters (32 Korean characters)
The scroll feature can be used to
display file and folder names that
are too long to display on the
screen. (if equipped)
Languages supported (Unicode sup-
port)
• Korean: 2,604 characters
• English: 94 characters
• Common Chinese characters:
4,888 characters
• Special symbols: 986 characters
Japanese/Simplified Chinese char-
acters are not supported.
Disc MP3 (Type B, Type C)
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
NOTICE
NOTICE
MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA
44100 22050 11025 32000
48000 24000 12000 44100
32000 16000 8000 48000
4-22
Multimedia System
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button and
select [Disc MP3].
• When a disc is inserted in the
audio system, disc playback
begins automatically.
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast-forward the
song that is currently playing.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to view a list of songs
available to play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’ or ‘Repeat folder’.
• Repeat all: Repeat all songs in
the playlist.
• Repeat current song: The song
that is currently playing is repeated.
• Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in a
random order.
• Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran-
dom order.
Menu
Press the [Menu] and select the
desired function.
• Information: Detailed information
on the song that is currently play-
ing is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Information
- Using the USB Devices
• Starting the vehicle while a USB
device is connected can damage the
device. Please disconnect USB
devices before starting the vehicle.
• Starting the vehicle or stopping the
engine while an external USB device
is connected can result in failure of
the external USB device to operate.
• Be cautious of static electricity when
connecting/disconnecting external
USB devices.
• An encrypted MP3 player is not rec-
ognized when connected as an exter-
nal device.
• External USB devices may not be
recognized, depending on the state
of the external USB device.
• Only products with byte/sectors for-
matted at 4 KB or lower are recog-
nized.
• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32
format are recognized; NTFS and
ExFAT file systems are not recog-
nized.
(Continued)
i
4-23
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Some USB devices are not recog-
nized due to compatibility issues.
• Do not touch the USB connections.
• Connecting and disconnecting USB
devices rapidly over a short period
of time can cause equipment failure.
• Abnormal sounds may be audible
when the USB device is disconnected.
• Turn the audio off before connecting
or disconnecting external USB
devices.
• Recognition may take longer
depending on the type, capacity or
file format of the external USB
device. This is not a product mal-
function.
• Use of USB devices for purposes
other than playing music files is pro-
hibited.
• Image display and video playback
are not supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use of USB accessories, including
charge and heat though the USB I/F,
can lead to reduced product per-
formance or malfunctions. Do not
use USB devices or accessories for
these purposes.
• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and
extension cables can result in the
vehicle’s audio system failing to rec-
ognize your USB device. Connect
the USB device directly to the multi-
media port of your vehicle.
• When using high-capacity USB
devices with logical drive divisions,
only files saved on the highest level
logical drive can be played.
If applications are loaded on a USB
drive, file playback may fail.
• Some MP3 players, cell phones, dig-
ital cameras, etc. (USB devices that
are not recognized as mobile stor-
age) may not operate normally
when connected.
• USB charging may not be supported
by some mobile devices.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Operation is guaranteed only for
standard (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory drives.
• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and
memory stick devices is not guaran-
teed.
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)
files cannot be played.
• SD-type USB memory, CF-type
USB memory, and other USB mem-
ory devices that require adapters
for connection are not supported.
• Proper operation of USB HDDs or
USB drives with connectors that
loosen due to vehicle vibrations is
not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
• USB products that are
used as key chains or
cell phone accessories
may damage the USB
jack and affect proper file playback.
Please refrain from use. Use only
products with plug connectors, as
shown in the following illustration.
• When MP3 devices or cell phones
are connected simultaneously
through AUX, BT Audio and USB
modes, a popping noise or malfunc-
tion may occur.
4-24
Multimedia System
USB
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [USB].
• Connect a USB drive to the USB
port to automatically play files on
the USB drive.
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’, ‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat
category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
4-25
Multimedia System
4
Information
The repeat folder function is available
only when songs are playing from the
[File] category under [List].
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle
category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran-
dom order
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Save to My Music: Songs on your
USB device can be saved to My
Music.
(1) File: Select a file to save.
(2) Mark all: Select all files.
(3) Unmark all: Deselect all files.
(4) Save: Save the selected file(s).
- Select the files you want to save,
and press the [Save]. This saves
the selected files to My Music.
- Saving is canceled if phone calls
are received or made while saving.
- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.
- The currently playing file on the
USB device cannot be changed
while saving.
- My Music cannot be used while
saving.
- Up to 700 MB can be saved.
• Information: Detailed information
on the currently playing song is dis-
played.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
i
4-26
Multimedia System
Information
- Using the iPod
®
Devices
• To use the audio system’s iPod
®
con-
trol function, use the dedicated
cable provided with your iPod
®
.
• Connecting the iPod
®
to the vehicle
during play may result in a loud
noise that lasts about one to two sec-
onds. Connect the iPod
®
to the vehi-
cle after stopping or pausing play.
• Connect the iPod
®
with the vehicle in
the ACC ON state to begin charging.
• When connecting the iPod
®
cable,
be sure to fully push the cable into
the port.
• When EQ effects are enabled simul-
taneously on external devices, such
as iPod
®
s and the audio system, the
EQ effects may overlap, causing
sound quality deterioration or dis-
tortion. Deactivate the EQ function
for all external devices, if possible.
• Noise may occur when your iPod
®
or the AUX port is connected.
Disconnect and store separately
when not in use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• There may be noise if the audio sys-
tem is used with an iPod
®
or AUX
external device connected to the
power jack. In these cases, discon-
nect the iPod
®
or external device
from the power jack.
• Play may be interrupted, or device
malfunctions may occur depending
on the characteristics of your
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
.
• Play may fail if your iPhone
®
is con-
nected through both Bluetooth
®
and
USB. In this case, select Dock con-
nector or Bluetooth
®
on your
iPhone
®
to change the sound output
settings.
• If your software version does not
support the communication proto-
col or your iPod
®
is not recognized
due to device failure, anomalies or
defects, iPod
®
mode cannot be used.
• iPod
®
nano (5th generation) devices
may not be recognized if the battery
is low. Charge sufficiently before use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The search and song play order in
the iPod
®
device may be different
from the search order in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
has failed due to an
internal defect, please reset the
iPod
®
(consult your iPod
®
manual).
• Depending on the software version,
the iPod
®
may fail to sync with the
system. If the media is removed or
disconnected before recognition, the
previous mode may not be restored
(iPad
®
cannot be charged).
• Cables other than the 1-meter cable
provided with iPod
®
/iPhone
®
prod-
ucts may not be recognized.
• When other music apps are used on
your iPod
®
, the system sync func-
tion may fail due to malfunction of
the iPod
®
application.
i
4-27
Multimedia System
4
iPod
®
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
• Connect your iPod
®
to the audio
USB port, press the [MEDIA] but-
ton, and select [iPod].
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or disable
‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat current
song’.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
4-28
Multimedia System
When other music programs are
running
When songs saved on your iPod
®
are playing through a separate music
app, the following screen is dis-
played.
(1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music.
(2) Play iPod files: Play music saved
on your iPod
®
.
(3) Album Image: View playback info.
Information
Operation cannot be carried out cor-
rectly due to iPod
®
application mal-
function.
Playing iPod files
• Select [Play iPod files] to play
songs saved on your iPod
®
.
If there are no songs saved on your
iPod
®
, the [Play iPod files] is dis-
abled.
Information
- Using Bluetooth
®
(BT) Audio
• Bluetooth
®
Audio mode can only be
used if a Bluetooth
®
-enabled phone
is connected. Only devices that sup-
port Bluetooth
®
audio can be used.
• If the Bluetooth
®
-enabled phone is
disconnected during play, the music
stops.
• When the TRACK UP/DOWN but-
tons are used during Bluetooth
®
audio streaming, a popping noise or
sound interruptions may occur,
depending on the cell phone device.
• Depending on the cell phone model,
the audio streaming function may
not be supported.
• If a phone call is made or received
when music is playing in Bluetooth
®
Audio mode, the call may mix with
the music.
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Audio mode after ending a call, play
might not resume automatically for
some cell phone models.
i
i
4-29
Multimedia System
4
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the car
audio system with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
allows the user to conveniently
make calls, receive calls, and
manage the phone book. Before
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, carefully read the
contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for pro-
longed periods of time is dan-
gerous and may lead to acci-
dents.
• When driving, view the screen
only for short periods of time.
BT Audio
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(4) Play/Pause
Pause or play music.
Information
• Some cell phone models may not
support particular functions.
• Bluetooth
®
audio volume is synced
with cell phone media volume.
Playback
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [BT Audio].
Changing songs
• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button
to play the previous or next song.
Information
Some cell phones may not support this
function.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’
or ‘Repeat category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
i
i
NOTICE
4-30
Multimedia System
Information
The repeat play function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the con-
nected Bluetooth device.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Information
The shuffle function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the con-
nected Bluetooth device.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Connections: The currently connected
Bluetooth
®
device can be changed.
• Information: Detailed information on
the currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
AUX
Running AUX
• Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [AUX].
• Connect the external device con-
nection jack to the AUX terminal to
run AUX.
(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
My Music
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
i
i
4-31
Multimedia System
4
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Press to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [My Music].
• My Music cannot be selected if it
does not contain music.
• Check the content of your USB
drive before saving music to My
Music.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
• Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Press the [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Press the [Repeat] to enable or dis-
able ‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current
song’ or ‘Repeat category’.
• Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Shuffle play
Press the [Shuffle] to enable/disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [Menu], and select the
desired function.
• Delete files: You can delete files
from My Music.
(1) File: Select saved file.
(2) Mark all: Select all files.
(3) Unmark all: Deselect all files.
4-32
Multimedia System
(4) Delete: Delete the selected file(s).
- Select the file to delete, then
press the [Delete] to delete it.
- Delete is canceled if phone calls
are received or made during
delete.
• Add to playlist: Frequently played
songs can be paired in a [Playlist].
- Songs can be played from the
[Playlist].
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Delete from playlist
When a song in the playlist is play-
ing, press the [Menu] and select
[Delete from playlist].
Select the song to delete, then press
[Delete].
Phone
Information
- Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Cellular Phone
• Bluetooth
®
is a near-field wireless
networking technology that uses the
2.4 GHz frequency to connect vari-
ous devices within a certain distance
wirelessly.
• The technology is used in PCs,
peripherals, Bluetooth
®
phones,
tablet PCs, household appliances
and automobiles. Devices support-
ing Bluetooth
®
can exchange data at
high speeds without physical cable
connections.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree devices enable
convenient access to phone functions
through cell phones equipped with
Bluetooth
®
.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
be supported by the Bluetooth
®
Handsfree function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When Bluetooth
®
is connected and
calls are attempted through a con-
nected cell phone from outside the
vehicle, the call is connected
through the Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
function of the vehicle.
• Please be sure to disconnect the
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree function through
your Bluetooth
®
device or the audio
screen.
i
4-33
Multimedia System
4
Safety precautions
• The Bluetooth
®
Handsfree function
helps drivers to drive safely. By
connecting a Bluetooth
®
-enabled
phone to the vehicle’s audio sys-
tem, phone calls can be made and
received through the audio system
and contacts can be managed.
Consult the user manual before
use.
• Excessive manipulation of controls
while driving, making it difficult to
pay attention to the road ahead,
can lead to accidents. Do not oper-
ate the device excessively while
driving.
• Looking at the screen for a pro-
longed time increases the risk of
accidents. Keep time spent looking
at the screen to a minimum.
Precautions when connecting
Bluetooth
®
devices
• The vehicle supports the following
Bluetooth
®
functions. Some
Bluetooth
®
devices may not sup-
port some functions.
1) Bluetooth
®
Handsfree phone calls
2) Operations during a call
(Private, Switch, Mic Vol. con-
trols)
3) Download call history saved to
the Bluetooth
®
device
4) Download contacts saved to the
Bluetooth
®
device
5) Automatic contacts/call history
download when Bluetooth
®
is
connected
6) Automatic Bluetooth
®
device
connection when the vehicle is
started
7) Bluetooth
®
audio streaming play-
back
• Before connecting the audio sys-
tem to your device, make sure your
device supports Bluetooth
®
.
• Even if your device supports
Bluetooth
®
, a Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion cannot be established if the
device’s Bluetooth
®
function is
switched off. Search and connect
with the Bluetooth
®
function
enabled.
• Pair or connect Bluetooth
®
devices
to the audio system with the vehi-
cle at a standstill.
• If a Bluetooth
®
connection is lost
due to abnormal conditions while a
Bluetooth
®
device is connected
(communication range exceeded,
device power OFF, communication
errors, etc.), the disconnected
Bluetooth
®
device is searched for
and automatically reconnected.
• If you want to disable the
Bluetooth
®
device auto-connect
function, turn the Bluetooth
®
func-
tion OFF on your device. Consult
the user manuals for individual
devices to see whether Bluetooth
®
is supported.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
device.
4-34
Multimedia System
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices are sub-
ject to intermittent Bluetooth
®
con-
nection failures. In this case, use
the following method.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
function off
on your Bluetooth
®
device ➟
Turn it on and try again.
2) Delete the paired device from
both the audio system and
Bluetooth
®
device, then pair
again.
3) Power down your Bluetooth
®
device ➟ Turn it on and try
again.
4) Completely remove the battery
from your Bluetooth
®
device;
reinsert it, reboot, and attempt
connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reat-
tempt connection.
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
device
Information on pairing Bluetooth
®
devices
• Pairing refers to the process of
pairing Bluetooth
®
cell phones or
devices with the system prior to
connection. This is a necessary
procedure for Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion and usage.
• Up to five devices can be paired.
• Pairing Bluetooth
®
device is not
allowed while vehicle is moving.
Pairing the first Bluetooth
®
device
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button
on the steering wheel remote control
➟ Search for the vehicle from the
Bluetooth
®
device, and pair ➟ Enter
the passkey on the Bluetooth
®
device or approve passkey ➟
Bluetooth
®
pairing completed.
1. When the [PHONE] button on the
audio or the [CALL] button on the
steering wheel remote control is
pressed, the following screen is dis-
played. Devices can now be paired.
(1) Device name: Searched name in
Bluetooth
®
device.
Information
The device name in the image above is
an example. Refer to your device for
the actual name of your device.
2. Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices in the Bluetooth
®
menu of
your Bluetooth
®
device (cell phone,
etc.).
3. Confirm that the device name in your
Bluetooth
®
device matches the
device name shown on the audio
screen, then select it.
i
4-35
Multimedia System
4
4. For devices that require passkey
confirmation, the following screen
is shown on the audio system. A
6-digit passkey input screen is
shown in the Bluetooth
®
device.
- After confirming that the 6-digit
passkey on the audio screen and
the Bluetooth
®
device are identi-
cal, press [OK] in your Bluetooth
®
device.
Information
The 6-digit passkey in the image
above is an example. Refer to your
vehicle for the actual passkey.
Pairing a second Bluetooth
®
device
Press the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth] ➟
Select [Connections] ➟ Select [Add
new].
- The pairing procedure from this
point is identical to [Pairing the first
Bluetooth device].
Information
• Bluetooth
®
standby mode lasts for
three minutes. If a device is not
paired within three minutes, pairing
is canceled. Start over from the
beginning.
• For most Bluetooth
®
devices, a con-
nection is established automatically
after pairing. Some devices, howev-
er, require separate confirmation
when connecting after pairing. Be
sure to check your Bluetooth
®
device after pairing to confirm that
it has connected.
i
i
4-36
Multimedia System
Connecting Bluetooth
®
devices
If there are no connected devices
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button in
the steering wheel remote control ➟
List of paired Bluetooth
®
devices ➟
Select the desired Bluetooth
®
device
from the list ➟ Connect Bluetooth
®
.
If there are connected devices
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Settings] ➟
Select [Connections] ➟ Select
Bluetooth
®
device to connect ➟ Select
[Connect] ➟ Connect Bluetooth
®
.
Information
• Only one Bluetooth
®
device can be
connected at a time.
• When a Bluetooth
®
device is con-
nected, other devices cannot be
paired.
Accepting/rejecting phone calls
Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth
®
connected.
(1) Caller name: If the caller number
is in your contacts, the correspon-
ding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(3) Accept: Accept call.
(4) Reject: Reject call.
i
4-37
Multimedia System
4
Information
• When the incoming call screen is
displayed, audio mode and the set-
tings screen cannot be shown. Only
call volume control is supported.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
support the call reject function.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
support the phone number display
function.
Operation during calls
Incoming call with Bluetooth
®
con-
nected ➟ Select [Accept].
(1) Call duration: Call duration display.
(2) Caller name: If the caller number is
in your contacts, the corresponding
name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(4) Keypad: Number keypad for
Automatic Response Service input
is displayed.
(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell
phone.
(6) Microphone Volume(Outgoing Volume):
Adjust outgoing voice volume.
(7) End: End call.
Information
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
support the Private function.
• The outgoing voice volume may vary
depending on the type of Bluetooth
®
device. If the outgoing voice volume is
too high or low, adjust the
Microphone Volume(Outgoing Volume).
ii
4-38
Multimedia System
Favourites
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select
[Favourites(Favorites)] ➟
Favourites(Favorites) list displayed.
(1) Favourites(Favorites) list: A list of
paired favourites(favorites) is dis-
played.
Connect a call when selected.
(2) Add to favourites(Favorites): Add
a downloaded phone number to
favourites(favorites).
(3) Delete: Delete a saved Favourites
(Favorites).
Information
• Up to 20 favourites can be paired
for each paired Bluetooth
®
device.
• Favourites can be accessed when the
Bluetooth
®
device they were paired
from is connected.
• The audio system does not down-
load favourites from Bluetooth
®
devices. Favourites must be newly
saved before use.
• To add to favourites, contacts must
be downloaded first.
• Saved favourites are not updated
even if the contacts of the connected
Bluetooth
®
device are changed. In
this case, favourites need to be delet-
ed and added again.
Call history
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Call history]
➟ Call history is displayed.
(1) Call history: Display the down-
loaded call history list.
Connect a call when selected.
(2) Sort by: Sort by all calls, dialed
calls, received calls or missed
calls.
(3) Download: Download call history
from connected Bluetooth
®
devices.
Information
• Up to 50 dialed, received and missed
calls are saved.
• When the latest call history is
received, the existing call history is
deleted.
i
i
4-39
Multimedia System
4
Contacts
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟
Select letter (ABC) ➟ Contacts dis-
played.
(1) Contacts: Display downloaded
contacts.
Connect a call when selected.
(2) Download: Download contacts from
connected Bluetooth
®
devices.
Information
• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.
• In some cases, additional confirmation
from your Bluetooth
®
device is neces-
sary when downloading contacts. If
downloading of contacts unsuccessful,
consult your Bluetooth
®
device’s set-
tings or the audio screen to approve
the download.
• Contacts without phone numbers
are not displayed.
Dial
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio ➟ Select [Dial].
(1) Phone number entry window: The
phone number entered using the
keypad is displayed.
(2) Clear
- Press to delete individual digits.
- Press and hold to delete the
entire phone number.
(3) Keypad: Enter phone number.
(4) Bluetooth
®
Phone name
- The name of the connected
Bluetooth
®
device is displayed.
- Contacts matching the keypad
number/letter input are displayed.
i
4-40
Multimedia System
(5) Call
- Enter and select a phone num-
ber to call.
- Select without entering a phone
number to see the most recent
dialed call.
Settings
Select the [PHONE] button on the
audio ➟ Select [Settings].
- For phone settings, refer to Setup
page.
Setup
Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System, Screensaver and
Display Off settings.
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system.
Display
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Display].
• Dimming mode(Mode): Audio screen
brightness can be adjusted to the
time of day.
• Brightness(Illumination): The bright-
ness of the audio screen can be
changed.
• Text scroll*: If text is too long to be
displayed on the screen, enable
the text scroll function.
* if equipped
Sound
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Sound].
• Position: Sound balance and pan-
ning can be adjusted.
• Equaliser(Tone): Sound tone color
can be adjusted.
• Speed dependent volume control:
Automatically adjust volume based
on vehicle speed.
• Beep: Select whether to play a beep
sound when the screen is touched.
4-41
Multimedia System
4
Date/Time
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].
• Set time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
• Set date: Set the date displayed on
the audio screen.
Bluetooth
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth].
• Connections: Control pairing, dele-
tion, connection and disconnection
of Bluetooth
®
devices.
• Auto connection priority: Set the
connection priority of Bluetooth
®
devices when the vehicle is started.
• Update contacts: Contacts can be
downloaded from connected
Bluetooth
®
devices.
• Bluetooth voice guidance*: Play or
mute voice prompts for Bluetooth
®
device pairing, connection and
errors.
* if equipped
Information
• When paired devices are deleted,
the call history and contacts of the
device saved to the audio system are
deleted.
• For Bluetooth
®
connections with
low connection priority, some time
may be required for the connection
to be established.
• Contacts can be downloaded only
from the currently connected
Bluetooth
®
device.
• If no Bluetooth
®
device is connected,
the Download Contacts button is
disabled.
• If the language setting is Slovakian,
Hungarian or Korean, Bluetooth
voice guidance* is not supported.
* if equipped
System
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [System].
• Memory information: View My
Music memory usage.
• Language: Change the user lan-
guage.
• Default: Reset the audio system.
Information
The system resets to the default val-
ues, and all saved data and settings
are lost.
i
i
4-42
Multimedia System
Screensaver
Set the information displayed when
the audio system is switched off or
the screen is turned off.
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Screensaver].
• Analogue: An analog clock is dis-
played.
• Digital: A digital clock is displayed.
• None: No information is displayed.
Display Off
To prevent glare, the screen can be
turned off with the audio system in
operation.
Select the [SETUP] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Display Off].
Information
Use ‘Screensaver’ to set the informa-
tion to be displayed when the screen is
turned off.
i
DDeeccllaarraattiioonn ooff CCoonnffoorrmmiittyy
CE for EU
4-43
Multimedia System
4
NCC for Taiwan
Driving your vehicle
Before driving.........................................................5-4
Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before starting...................................................................5-4
Ignition switch ........................................................5-5
Key ignition switch............................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button................................................5-9
Dual clutch transmission.....................................5-15
Dual clutch transmission operation............................5-15
Parking...............................................................................5-23
Good driving practices...................................................5-23
Braking system.....................................................5-25
Power brakes ...................................................................5-25
Disc brakes wear indicator...........................................5-26
Parking brake...................................................................5-26
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-29
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-31
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-34
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-36
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-36
Good braking practices..................................................5-37
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) ..................5-38
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-39
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-43
Limitations of the system .............................................5-45
Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)...........5-47
System setting and activation......................................5-47
AEB warning message and system control..............5-49
AEB front radar sensor.................................................5-52
System malfunction........................................................5-53
Limitations of the system .............................................5-55
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-59
LKAS operation................................................................5-60
Warning light and message ..........................................5-64
LKAS function change ...................................................5-65
Limitations of the System.............................................5-66
Speed limit control system .................................5-67
Speed Limit Control Operation.....................................5-67
Cruise control .......................................................5-69
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-69
Smart Cruise Control system..............................5-75
To Adjust the Sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control ......................................................5-77
To convert to Cruise Control mode ............................5-77
Smart Cruise Control speed..........................................5-78
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance.............................................................................5-83
Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.....5-85
Limitations of the system .............................................5-87
5
5
Special driving conditions...................................5-92
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-92
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-92
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-93
Driving at night................................................................5-93
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-93
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-94
Highway driving...............................................................5-94
Winter driving.......................................................5-95
Snow or icy conditions ..................................................5-95
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-97
Vehicle weight ....................................................5-100
Overloading ....................................................................5-100
Trailer towing .....................................................5-101
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the tailgate open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle
• Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before starting
• Make sure the hood, the tailgate,
and the doors are securely closed
and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the mes-
sages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are car-
rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.
BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop-
erly belted whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. For more infor-
mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedes-
trians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reac-
tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don't
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driv-
er or call a taxi.
IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the igni-
tion switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
5-6
Driving your vehicle
Key ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-
vided the ignition switch is not in the
ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed. (if
equipped)
• NEVER turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK or ACC
position while the vehicle is in
motion except in an emer-
gency. This will result in
engine turning off and loss of
power assist for the steering
and brake systems. This may
lead to loss of directional con-
trol and braking function,
which could cause an acci-
dent.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, apply the parking
brake, and turn ignition switch
to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle move-
ment may occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056172L/OAE056173L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056175L/OAE056174L
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
Action Notes
LOCK
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the key in at
the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.
(if equipped)
ACC
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition
switch to the ACC position, turn the key
while turning the steering wheel right and
left to release tension.
ON
This is the normal key position when the vehicle has started.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition
switch from ACC to ON.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON
position when the vehicle is not running to
prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the vehicle, turn the ignition switch to the START position.
The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.
The engine will crank until you release the
key.
5-8
Driving your vehicle
Starting the vehicle
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
" " comes on and release it.
Information
• It is best to maintain a moderate
engine speed until the vehicle engine
comes up to normal operating tem-
perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
• If ambient temperature is low, the
" " indicator may remain illu-
minated longer than the normal
amount of time.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
• If the " " indicator turns off
while you are in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and turn the ignition switch to
the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the vehicle.
NOTICE
i
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,
such as high heels, ski boots,
sandals, flip-flops, etc., may
interfere with your ability to
use the brake and accelerator
pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake padel
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
Engine Start/Stop button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-
minate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
OAE056001
To turn the hybrid system off in
an emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR Rapidly press
and release the Engine Start/
Stop button three times (within
three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the hybrid system
without depressing the brake
pedal by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine
Start/Stop button while the
vehicle is in motion except in
an emergency. This will result
in the hybrid system turning
off and loss of power assist
for the steering and brake
systems. This may lead to
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking brake,
press the Engine Start/Stop
button to the OFF position, and
take the Smart Key with you.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.
WARNING
5-10
Driving your vehicle
Engine Stop/Start button positions
Button Position Action Notice
OFF
To turn off the vehicle, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without the shift lever in P (Park), the Engine
Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF
position, but turns to the ACC position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle
from theft.
If the steering wheel is not locked properly
when you open the driver's door, the warning
chime will sound.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
• If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ACC position for more than one hour,
the battery power will turn off automatically
to prevent the battery from discharging.
• If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release tension.
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
Button Position Action Notice
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the vehicle is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the vehicle is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the vehicle, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the brake pedal, the vehi-
cle does not start and the Engine Start/Stop
button changes as follows:
OFF
→
→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF or ACC
5-12
Driving your vehicle
Starting the hybrid system
Information
• The vehicle will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, and when it is far away from the
driver, the hybrid system may not
start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. When the smart key
is not in the vehicle, the " " indi-
cator will blink and the warning
"Key not in vehicle" will come on.
When all doors are closed, the chime
will also sound for about 5 seconds.
Keep the smart key in the vehicle
when in the ACC position or if the
hybrid system is ON.
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton. If the vehicle starts, the " "
indicator will come on.
i
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-
flops, etc., may interfere with
your ability to use the brake
and accelerator pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
• If ambient temperature is low, the
" " indicator may remain illumi-
nated longer than the normal amount
of time.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the " " indicator turns off
while you are in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the vehicle.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
Do not press the Engine Start/Stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you cannot normally start the
hybrid system. Replace the fuse
with a new one. If you are not able
to replace the fuse, you can start
the vehicle by pressing and hold-
ing the Engine Start/Stop button
for 10 seconds with the Engine
Start/Stop button in the ACC posi-
tion.
For your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
vehicle.
NOTICENOTICE
i
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the vehicle by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the pic-
ture above.
i
OAE056002
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5
DDUUAALL CCLLUUTTCCHH TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
OAE056004L/OAE056004R
The shift lever can freely operate.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Manual shift mode
Manual shift mode
■ Left-hand drive ■ Right-hand drive
Dual clutch transmission operation
The dual clutch transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.
5-16
Driving your vehicle
• The dual clutch transmission gives
the driving feel of a manual trans-
mission, yet provides the ease of a
fully automatic transmission. Unlike
a traditional automatic transmis-
sion, the gear shifting can some-
times be felt and heard on the dual
clutch transmission, as the actua-
tors engage the clutch and the
gear is selected.
The dual clutch transmission can
be thought of as an automatically
shifting manual transmission.
When D (Drive) is selected, the
transmission will automatically shift
through the gears similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
• The dual clutch transmission incor-
porates a dry-type dual clutch
mechanism, which allows for better
acceleration performance and
increased fuel efficiency while driv-
ing. But it differs from a conven-
tional automatic transmission in
that it does not incorporate a
torque converter. Instead, the tran-
sition from one gear to the next is
managed by clutch slip, especially
at lower speeds. As a result, shifts
are sometimes more noticeable,
and a light vibration can be felt as
the transmission shaft speed is
matched with the engine shaft
speed. This is a normal condition of
the dual clutch transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque more directly and provides
a direct-drive feeling which may
feel different from a conventional
automatic transmission. This may
be more noticeable when launch-
ing the vehicle from a stop or when
traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi-
cle speeds.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
WARNING
5-17
Driving your vehicle
5
• When rapidly accelerating from a
lower vehicle speed, the engine
rpm may increase dramatically as
a result of clutch slip as the dual
clutch transmission selects the cor-
rect gear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When accelerating from a stop on
an incline, press the accelerator
smoothly and gradually to avoid
any shudder feeling or jerkiness.
• When traveling at a lower vehicle
speed, if you release the accelera-
tor pedal quickly, you may feel
engine braking before the trans-
mission changes gears. This
engine braking feeling is similar to
operating a manual transmission at
low speed.
• When driving downhill, you may
wish to move the gear shift lever to
Manual Shift mode and downshift
to a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the vehicle on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self
test. This is a normal sound for the
dual clutch transmission.
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use
the foot brake or the parking
brake. If the vehicle is held by
applying the accelerator pedal
on a hill the clutch and trans-
mission will be overheated
resulting in damage.
At this time, a warning message
"Steep grade! Press brake
pedal" will appear on the LCD
display and you may feel a vibra-
tion.
(Continued)
NOTICE
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLE055018/OAE056006L
5-18
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the clutch becomes overheat-
ed by excessive use of the
clutch to hold on a hill, you may
notice a shudder feeling and a
blinking display on the instru-
ment cluster. When this occurs,
the clutch is disabled until the
clutch cools to normal tempera-
tures. If this occurs, pull over to
a safe location, shift into P
(Park) and apply the foot brake
for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead
to damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink,
for your safety, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Under certain conditions, such
as repeated stop-and-go launch-
es on steep grades, the trans-
mission clutches may overheat.
When the clutches are overheat-
ed, the transmission safe pro-
tection mode logic is enabled.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the safe protection mode logic
is enabled, the gear position indi-
cator on the cluster blinks with a
chime sound. At this time, a
warning message "Transmission
temp. is high! Stop safely" or
"Transmission overheated! Stop
for – min." will appear on the LCD
display and driving may not be
smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse. To return the normal driv-
ing condition, stop the vehicle
and apply the foot brake for a
few minutes before driving off.
Information
Gear shifts may be more noticeable
than a conventional automatic trans-
mission. This is a normal characteris-
tic of this type of dual clutch trans-
mission.
i
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTLE055023/OAE056008L
OTLE055027/OAE056010L
5-19
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
During the first 1,500 km (1,000
miles), you may feel that the vehicle
may not be smooth when accelerating
at low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and perform-
ance of your new vehicle is continu-
ously optimized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
Shift lever position
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above
and still cannot shift the lever out of
P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release"
in this chapter.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the vehicle off.
NOTICE
i
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
vehicle off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-20
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a 6-gear sequence, pro-
viding the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmis-
sion will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
If you drive the vehicle with the shift
lever in D (Drive), the vehicle will
automatically change to ECO mode.
The indicator will illuminate on
the instrument cluster.
When driving in ECO mode, the vehi-
cle improves fuel efficiency for eco-
friendly driving.
S (Sport)
If you drive the vehicle with the shift
lever in S (Sport), the vehicle will
automatically change to SPORT
mode. The indicator will illumi-
nate on the instrument cluster.
When driving in SPORT mode, the
vehicle provides sporty but firm rid-
ing.
Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
i
NOTICE
5-21
Driving your vehicle
5
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In manual shift mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1
st
gear is automat-
ically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+ (Up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2
nd
gear which is better for smooth driv-
ing on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the - (Down) side to shift
back to the 1
st
gear.
• When driving in manual shift mode,
slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged if the engine rpms
are outside of the allowable range.
i
OAE056012
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-22
Driving your vehicle
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the dual clutch trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, and then do the follow-
ing:
Type A
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Push the shift-lock release button.
4. Move the shift lever while pushing
the shift-lock release button.
5. Stop pushing the shift-lock release
button.
6. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the vehicle.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
Type B
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever while holding
down the screwdriver.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
release access hole then install
the cap.
7. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the vehicle.
OAE056011 OAE056011L
5-23
Driving your vehicle
5
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-24
Driving your vehicle
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
WARNING
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or the
vehicle is turned off while driving, the
power assist for the brakes will not
work. You can still stop your vehicle
by applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending down a
long or steep hill, move the
shift lever to Manual Shift
mode and manually downshift
to a lower gear in order to
control your speed without
using the brake pedal exces-
sively. Applying the brakes
continuously will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, light-
ly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintain-
ing a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes func-
tion correctly.
WARNING
5-26
Driving your vehicle
Do not depress the brake pedal
continuously without the " "
indicator ON. The battery may be
discharged.
• Some noise and vibration may
occur during braking. This is
normal.
• In below cases, some electric
brake pump noise and motor
vibration may occur temporarily.
This is normal operation.
- When the pedal is depressed
very quickly
- When the pedal is depressed
multiple times in short inter-
vals
- When the ABS function is acti-
vated during braking
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Information
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle.
To apply the parking brake:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAE056014
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down and it will release automatical-
ly.
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, we
recommend that you have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE056013
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into P
(Park) position, then apply the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-28
Driving your vehicle
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the park-
ing brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the braking system
and cause premature wear or
damage to brake parts. Make sure
the parking brake is released and
the Brake Warning Light is off
before driving.
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON posi-
tion (do not start the
vehicle).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while the vehicle is on,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
NOTICE
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or dis-
tance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather con-
ditions.
(Continued)
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehi-
cle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-30
Driving your vehicle
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-
ty. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-
ing wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake sys-
tem may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light ( ) will stay
on for several seconds after the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
During that time, the ABS will go
through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. We recom-
mend that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and apply your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light ( ) may illuminate. Pull
your car over to a safe place and
turn the vehicle off.
Restart the vehicle. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with your ABS system. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light ( ) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
i
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light ( ) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normal-
ly. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, we recommend
that you contact your HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
5-31
Driving your vehicle
5
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle's brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approxi-
mately three seconds. After both
lights go off, the ESC is enabled.
OAE056015
OAE056016
■ Type A
■ Type B
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
WARNING
5-32
Driving your vehicle
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the vehi-
cle may not respond to the acceler-
ator as it does under routine condi-
tions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the Cruise
Control automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be reen-
gaged when the road conditions
allow. See "Cruise Control System"
later in this chapter. (if equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolutions per minute)
may not increase even if you press
the accelerator pedal deeply. This is
to maintain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message "Traction Control disabled"
will illuminate. In this state, the trac-
tion control function of ESC (engine
management) is disabled, but the
brake control function of ESC (brak-
ing management) still operates.
• State 2
Press and hold the ESC OFF button
continuously for more than 3 sec-
onds. The ESC OFF indicator light
and message "Traction & Stability
Control disabled" illuminates and a
warning chime sounds. In this state,
both the traction control function of
ESC (engine management) and the
brake control function of ESC (brak-
ing management) are disabled.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
vehicle, the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OLF054101N/OAE056018L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLE055140/OAE056020L
5-33
Driving your vehicle
5
Indicator lights
When the ignition switch is pressed
to the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates we recommend that
the vehicle be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized wheels and tires
installed.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
NOTICE
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER attempt
to accelerate. NEVER turn the
ESC off while the ESC indicator
light is blinking or you may lose
control of the vehicle resulting in
an accident.
WARNING
5-34
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle
to spin excessively while the
ESC, ABS, and parking brake
warning lights are displayed. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while
these lights are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).
Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system opera-
tion.
Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM)
The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking sud-
denly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 15 km/h (9 mph) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 20 km/h (12 mph) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-
sation in the brake pedal. This is nor-
mal and it means your VSM is active.
i
NOTICE
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead.The VSM is not a substi-
tute for safe driving practices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions.The VSM sys-
tem will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
WARNING
5-35
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a banked road such as
gradient or incline.
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric power steering) warning
light ( ) is on or blinks.
VSM OFF condition
To cancel VSM operation, press the
ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) will illuminate.
To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF
button again. The ESC OFF indicator
light will go out.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the VSM
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized tires and wheels
installed.
NOTICE
i
If ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light ( ) stays
on or blinks, your vehicle may
have a malfunction with the
VSM system. When the warning
light illuminates we recommend
that the vehicle be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING
5-36
Driving your vehicle
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slide
backwards on a steep slope, before
depressing the accelerator after a
stop. The HAC prevents the vehicle
from sliding backwards by automati-
cally operating the brake systems for
about 2 seconds. The brake systems
are automatically released, when the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
Information
• The HAC does not operate when the
shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
• The HAC activates even when the
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is
off. However, it does not activate,
when the ESC does not normally
operate.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
(if equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking
the stop lights, while sharply and
severely braking.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The
deceleration power exceeds 7 m/s
2
,
and the driving speed exceeds 55
km/h (34 mph).)
• The ABS is activated.
The hazard warning flasher automat-
ically turns ON after blinking the stop
lights, when the driving speeds is
decelerated under 40 km/h (25 mph),
when the ABS is deactivated, and
when the sudden braking situation is
over.
The hazard warning flasher turns
OFF, when the driving speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph) after a complete
stop. The hazard warning flasher
turns OFF, when the vehicle drives at
a low speed for a certain period of
time. The driver can manually turn
OFF the hazard warning flasher by
pressing the button.
Information
The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) sys-
tem will not work if the hazard warn-
ing flasher already blinks.
i
i
The HAC is activated only for
about 2 seconds, so always
depress the accelerator pedal
to begin driving upwards after a
stop.
WARNING
5-37
Driving your vehicle
5
Good braking practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon as
it is safe to do so and we recommend
that you call an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion.
Vehicles parked with the park-
ing brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadver-
tently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING
5-38
Driving your vehicle
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear
bumper to monitor and warn the driv-
er of an approaching vehicle in the
driver's blind spot area.
The system monitors the rear area of
the vehicle and provides information
to the driver with an audible alert and
a indicator on the outside rearview
mirrors.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The blind spot detection range
varies relative to vehicle speed.
Note that if your vehicle is travel-
ing much faster than the vehicles
around you, the warning will not
occur.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
The Lane Change Assist feature
will alert you when a vehicle is
approaching in an adjacent lane
at a high rate of speed. If the driv-
er activates the turn signal when
the system detects an oncoming
vehicle, the system sounds an
audible alert.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert fea-
ture monitors approaching cross
traffic from the left and right side
of the vehicle when your vehicle is
in reverse. The feature will operate
when the vehicle is moving in
reverse below about 10 km/h (6
mph). If oncoming cross traffic is
detected a warning chime will
sound.
BBLLIINNDD SSPPOOTT DDEETTEECCTTIIOONN SSYYSSTTEEMM ((BBSSDD)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAE056106
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
• Always be aware of road con-
ditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situations
even though the Blind Spot
Detection System is operat-
ing.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system to assist you. Do
not entirely rely on the sys-
tem. Always pay attention,
while driving, for your safety.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substi-
tute for proper and safe driving.
Always drive safely and use
caution when changing lanes
or backing up the vehicle. The
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
WARNING
5-39
Driving your vehicle
5
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
(if equipped)
Operating conditions
To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the
Ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator on the BSD switch will
illuminate. When the vehicle speed
exceeds 30 km/h (20 mph), the sys-
tem will be activated.
To cancel:
Press the BSD switch again. The
indicator on the switch will go off.
When the system is not used, turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
Information
• If the vehicle is turned off then on
again, the BSD system returns to the
previous state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the outside rearview
mirror.
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. The vehicle speed is above about
30 km/h (20 mph).
3. An oncoming vehicle is detected
in the blind spot area.
i
■ Type A
OAE056033
■ Type B
OAE056034
5-40
Driving your vehicle
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off according to the
driving conditions of the vehicle.
OAE056035
■ Left side
■ Right side
OAE056036
■ Left side
OAE056037
■ Right side
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being
detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mir-
ror will also blink.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deacti-
vated.
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5
• The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
- To deactivate the warning chime:
Cluster type A
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist → Rear Collision Warning
and deselect Blind Spot Detection
Sound' on the LCD display.
Cluster type B
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist and deselect Blind Spot
Detection Sound' on the LCD dis-
play.
Information
The warning chime function helps
alert the driver. Deactivate this func-
tion only when it is necessary.
- To activate the warning chime:
Cluster type A
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist → Rear Collision Warning
and select Blind Spot Detection
Sound' on the LCD display.
Cluster type B
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist and select Blind Spot
Detection Sound' on the LCD dis-
play.
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for proper operation of the system.
i
OAE056065
5-42
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
Blind Spot Detection disabled.
Radar blocked.
• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
BSD sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BSD switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
When the BSD canceled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the BSD system should operate nor-
mally after about 10 minutes of driv-
ing the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check BSD system
If there is a problem with the BSD
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch
will turn off. The system will turn off
automatically. We recommend that
you have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLE055040/OAE056043L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056040L/OAE056041L
5-43
Driving your vehicle
5
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) (if equipped)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature
monitors approaching cross traffic
from the left and right side of the
vehicle when your vehicle is in
reverse.
Operating conditions
To operate:
Cluster type A
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist → Rear Collision Warning and
select Rear Cross Traffic Alert' on the
LCD display.
Cluster type B
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist and select Rear Cross Traffic
Alert' on the LCD display.
The system will turn on and standby
to activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) and with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
Information
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
detecting range is approximately
0.5 m ~ 20 m (1 ft ~ 65 ft). An
approaching vehicle will be detected if
their vehicle speed is within 4 km/h ~
36 km/h (2.5 ~ 22.5 mph ).
Note that the detecting range may
vary under certain conditions. As
always, use caution and pay close
attention to your surroundings when
backing up your vehicle.
Warning type
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound, the warning
light on the outside rearview mirror
will blink and a message will appear
on the LCD display.
i
• Type A
■ Left
■ Right
• Type B
• Type A
• Type B
OAE056150L/OAE056046L
OAE056151L/OAE056047L
5-44
Driving your vehicle
Information
• The warning chime will turn off
when the detected vehicle moves out
of the sensing area or if your vehicle
is moved away from the detected
vehicle.
• The system may not operate proper-
ly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
• If the sensing area near the rear
bumper is blocked by either a wall
or barrier or by a parked vehicle,
the system sensing area may be
reduced.
i
(Continued)
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always
drive safely and use caution
when changing lanes or back-
ing up your vehicle. The Blind
Spot Detection System (BSD)
may not detect every object
alongside the vehicle.
• The warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror will illu-
minate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely
rely on the system but check
your surrounding before
changing lanes or backing the
vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
• The system may not work prop-
erly when the bumper has been
damaged, or if the rear bumper
has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs some-
what according to the width of
the road. When the road is nar-
row, the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
The BSD indicator on the outer side
view mirror may not illuminate
properly when:
• The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is damaged.
• The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
• The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
• The window is tinted.
Limitations of the system
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
• The vehicle drives on a curved
road or through a tollgate.
• The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in the
luggage compartment, abnormal
tire pressure, etc.
• The vehicle drives in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
• There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
NOTICE
5-46
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle is driven near areas
containing metal substances such
as a construction zone, railroad,
etc.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
• When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
• While changing lanes.
• While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
• When the other vehicle approach-
es very close.
• When a trailer or carrier is
installed.
• When the temperature near the
rear bumper area is high or low.
• When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
• When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
• If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
• When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle.
• When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane from
you.
• When driving on wet surface.
5-47
Driving your vehicle
The Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to detect
and monitor the vehicle ahead or
detect a pedestrian (if equipped) in the
roadway through radar signals and
camera recognition to warn the driver
that a collision is imminent, and if nec-
essary, apply emergency braking.
System setting and activation
System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting:
Cluster type A
'User Settings → Driving Assist →
Forward Collision Warning →
Autonomous Emergency Braking'
Cluster type B
'User Settings → Driving Assist →
Autonomous Emergency Braking'
The AEB deactivates, when the driv-
er cancels the system setting.
AAUUTTOONNOOMMOOUUSS EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY BBRRAAKKIINNGG ((AAEEBB)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
5
Take the following precautions
when using the Autonomous
Emergency Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not
intended to, nor does it
replace the need for extreme
care and attention of the driv-
er. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sen-
sors are limited. Pay attention
to the road conditions at all
times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road condi-
tions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. AEB does not stop the
vehicle completely and is not
a collision avoidance system.
WARNING
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056095L/OAE056022L
5-48
The warning light illumi-
nates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. If the warning light
remains ON when the AEB is acti-
vated, we recommend you to have
the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time on the LCD display.
Go to the 'User Settings → Driving
Assist → Forward Collision Warning
→ Late/Normal/Early'.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning includes the fol-
lowing:
• Early:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maximizes the
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
• Normal:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated normally. This
setting allows for a nominal
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
• Late:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated later than nor-
mal. This setting reduces the
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056096L/OAE056023L
5-49
Driving your vehicle
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB gets ready to be activated,
when the AEB is selected on the
LCD display, and when the following
prerequisites are satisfied.
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated.
- To enable the system to detect
pedestrians ahead, the vehicle
driving speed must be between 8
km/h – 70 km/h (5 mph – 45 mph).
- To enable the system to detect a
vehicle ahead, the vehicle driving
speed must be between 8 km/h –
180 km/h (5 mph – 110 mph).
When traveling above 80 km/h (50
mph), the AEB system only initiates
partial braking. This is to prevent
unintended full braking to stop in the
middle of the highway.
AEB warning message and
system control
The AEB produces warning mes-
sages and warning alarms in accor-
dance with the collision risk levels,
such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-
cle in front, insufficient braking dis-
tance, or pedestrian detection. Also,
it controls the brakes in accordance
with the collision risk levels.
5
• Completely stop the vehicle
on a safe location before
operating the switch on the
steering wheel to activate
/deactivate the AEB system.
• The AEB automatically acti-
vates upon placing the Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON
position. The driver can deac-
tivate the AEB by canceling
the system setting on the LCD
display.
• The AEB automatically deacti-
vates upon canceling the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control).
When the ESC is canceled,
the AEB cannot be activated
on the LCD display.
WARNING
5-50
Forward Warning (1
st
warning)
This initial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a warning
chime.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display. The
options for the initial Forward Collision
Warning include Early, Normal or Late
initial warning time.
Collision Warning (2
nd
warning)
This warning message appears on the
LCD display with a warning chime.
Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decel-
erate the vehicle.
- If a vehicle is detected, your vehi-
cle speed may decelerate moder-
ately.
- If your vehicle is traveling less than
70 km/h (45 mph) and a pedestri-
an is detected within the Collision
Warning (2nd warning) stage, your
vehicle speed may decelerate
moderately. When your vehicle
drives faster than 70 km/h (45
mph) with a pedestrian in front, the
AEB does not operate.
Emergency braking
(3
rd
warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decel-
erate the vehicle.
- If the detected vehicle in front is
driving slower than 80 km/h (50
mph) your vehicle speed may
decelerate sharply to avoid a col-
lision. If the detected vehicle in
front is driving faster than 80
km/h (50 mph), your vehicle
speed may decelerate moderate-
ly.
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056024L/OAE056025L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056026L/OAE056027L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056029L/OAE056030L
5-51
Driving your vehicle
- If your vehicle drives slower than
70 km/h (45 mph) with a pedestri-
an in front, the driving speed may
abruptly decrease. When your
vehicle drives faster than 70 km/h
(45 mph) with a pedestrian in
front, the AEB does not operate.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver's depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the accelerator
pedal, or when the driver abruptly
operates the steering wheel.
• The AEB brake control is automat-
ically canceled, when risk factors
disappear.
5
The driver should always use
extreme caution while operating
the vehicle, whether or not there
is a warning message or alarm
from the AEB system.
CAUTION
The braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
5-52
AEB front radar sensor
In order for the AEB system to oper-
ate properly, always make sure the
radar sensor cover is clean and free
of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow,
or foreign substances on the lens
may adversely affect the sensing
performance of the radar.
Warning message and warning
light
Auto Emergency Braking disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor cover is blocked
with dirt, snow, or debris, the AEB
system operation may stop tem-
porarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD dis-
play.
Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and
clean the radar sensor cover before
operating the AEB system.
The AEB may not properly operate in
an area (e.g. open terrain), where
any substances are not detected
after turning ON the engine.
Driving your vehicle
The AEB system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
AEB system.
WARNING
OAE056028
OAE056031L
5-53
Driving your vehicle
• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing so may adversely
affect the sensing performance
of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and cover clean and free of dirt
and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressur-
ized water directly on the sensor
or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper
alignment, the AEB system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the
radar sensor, the AEB system
may not operate properly. We
recommend you to have the
vehicle inspected by authorized
HYUNDAI.
• Use only genuine parts to repair
or replace a damaged sensor or
sensor cover. Do not apply paint
to the sensor cover.
System malfunction
Check AEB system
• When the AEB is not working prop-
erly, the AEB warning light ( )
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few sec-
onds. After the message disap-
pears, the master warning light
( ) will illuminate. In this case, we
recommend you to have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) warning light.
NOTICE
5
OAE056038L
5-54
Driving your vehicle
• The AEB is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver's con-
venience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to con-
trol the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the AEB
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving condi-
tions, the AEB system may
activate prematurely. This ini-
tial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a
warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestri-
an ahead. The AEB system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If there is a malfunction with the
AEB system, the autonomous
emergency braking is not
applied even though the brak-
ing system is operating normal-
ly.
• If the vehicle in front stops
suddenly, you may have less
control of the brake system.
Therefore, always keep a safe
distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
• The AEB system may activate
during braking and the vehi-
cle may stop suddenly shift-
ing loose objects toward the
passengers. Always keep
loose objects secured.
• The AEB system may not acti-
vate if the driver applies the
brake pedal to avoid a colli-
sion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The AEB system operates
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
The AEB system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
The AEB system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
The AEB system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
The AEB system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehi-
cle (for example on a dead
end street.)
In these cases, you must
maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
reduce the driving speed in
order to maintain a safe dis-
tance.
WARNING
5-55
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the system
The Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to monitor
the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian in
the roadway through radar signals
and camera recognition to warn the
driver that a collision is imminent, and
if necessary, apply emergency brak-
ing.
In certain situations, the radar sen-
sor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the AEB sys-
tem may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
AEB operation may be limited.
Detecting vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves
• There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
• The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited
• The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a motor-
cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
• The driver's field of view is not well
illuminated (either too dark or too
much reflection or too much back-
light that obscures the field of view)
• The vehicle in front does not have
their rear lights properly turned ON
• The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when enter-
ing or exiting a tunnel
• The vehicle in front is driving errat-
ically
• The vehicle is on unpaved or
uneven rough surfaces, or roads
with sudden gradient changes
• The vehicle is moving under
ground level or inside a building
• The vehicle is driven near areas
containing metal substances such
as a construction zone, railroad,
etc.
5
5-56
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the AEB system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
In certain instances on a curved
road, the AEB system may activate
prematurely.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
The AEB system may recognize a
vehicle in the next lane when driving
on a curved road.
In this case, the system may unnec-
essarily alarm the driver and apply
the brake.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving. If
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
Also, when necessary depress the
accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-
tem from unnecessarily decelerating
your vehicle.
- Driving on a slope
The performance of the AEB decreas-
es while driving upward or downward
on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-
cle in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.
Driving your vehicle
OAE056100 OAE056101 OAE056102
5-57
Driving your vehicle
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the AEB system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, espe-
cially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly. In this case, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the AEB sys-
tem may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, addi-
tional special attention is required.
The AEB system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.
5
OAE056103 OAE056109 OAE056105
5-58
Detecting pedestrians
(if equipped)
The sensor may be limited when:
• The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
• The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
• The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the back-
ground, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recogni-
tion system
• The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
• It is difficult to detect and distin-
guish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd
• There is an item similar to a per-
son’s body structure
• The pedestrian is small
• The pedestrian has impaired
mobility
• The sensor recognition is limited
Information
In some instances, the AEB system
may be cancelled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
i
Driving your vehicle
• Do not use the Autonomous
Emergency Braking system
when towing a vehicle.
Application of the AEB sys-
tem while towing may
adversely affect the safety of
your vehicle or the towing
vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The AEB system is designed
to detect and monitor the
vehicle ahead or detect a
pedestrian in the roadway
through radar signals and
camera recognition. It is not
designed to detect bicycles,
motorcycles, or smaller
wheeled objects such as lug-
gage bags, shopping carts, or
strollers.
• Never try to test the operation
of the AEB system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
WARNING
5-59
Driving your vehicle
The Lane Keeping Assist System
detects lane markers on the road,
and assists the driver's steering to
help keep the vehicle between lanes.
When the system detects the vehicle
straying from its lane, it alerts the
driver with a visual and audible warn-
ing, while applying a slight counter-
steering torque, trying to prevent the
vehicle from moving out of its lane.
LLAANNEE KKEEEEPPIINNGG AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((LLKKAASS)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
5
OAE056048
The Lane Keeping Assist
System is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always be aware of the sur-
rounding and steer the vehicle.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Keeping
Assist System (LKAS):
• The steering wheel is not con-
tinuously controlled so if the
vehicle speed is at a higher
rate when leaving a lane the
vehicle may not be controlled
by the system.
• Do not steer the steering
wheel suddenly when the
steering wheel is being assist-
ed by the system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• LKAS prevents the driver
from moving out of the lane
unintentionally by assisting
the driver's steering. However,
the driver should not solely
rely on the system but always
pay attention on the steering
wheel to stay in the lane.
• Always check the road condi-
tion and surroundings and be
cautious when the system
cancels, does not operate or
malfunctions.
• The system detects lane lines
and controls the steering
wheel by a camera, therefore,
if the lane lines are hard to
detect, the system may not
work properly.
Please refer to "Limitations of
the system".
• Do not attempt to repair the
LKAS camera and do not
remove any parts.
• Do not place objects that
reflect light on the dashboard
while driving.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-60
LKAS operation
To activate the LKAS:
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, press the LKAS button
located on the instrument panel on
the lower left hand side of the driver.
The indicator in the cluster display
will initially illuminate white. This indi-
cates the LKAS is in the READY but
NOT ENABLED state.
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not place any accessories
near the rearview mirror.
• Do not tint the windshield
glass.
• The operation of the LKAS
may be affected by several
factors including environmen-
tal conditions that affect the
ability of the camera to detect
the lanes in front of you. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to pay careful attention to the
roadway and to maintain the
vehicle in its intended lane at
all times.
• Always have your hands on
the steering wheel while the
LKAS system is activated. If
you continue to drive with
your hands off the steering
wheel after the "Keep hands
on steering wheel" warning
message appears, the system
will will stop controlling the
steering wheel.
• Always be cautious when
using the system.
■ Type A
OAE056049L
■ Type B
OAE056050L
5-61
Driving your vehicle
LKAS activation
• The LKAS screen will appear on
the SCC/LKAS screen of the LCD
display if the system is activated.
• When both lane lines are detected
and all the conditions to activate
the LKAS are satisfied, a green
steering wheel indicator will illumi-
nate and the LKAS indicator light
will change from white to green.
This indicates that the LKAS sys-
tem is in the ENABLED state and
the steering wheel will be able to
be controlled.
• If the system detects a lane line,
the color changes from gray to
white.
• If the system detects the left lane
line, the left lane line color will
change from gray to white.
5
OAEE056122L
The Lane Keeping Assist
System is a system to prevent
the driver from leaving the lane.
However, the driver should not
solely rely on the system but
always check the road condi-
tions when driving.
WARNING
■ Line undetected ■ Line detected
OAEE056123L/OAEE056124L
5-62
• If the system detects the right lane
line, the right lane line color will
change from gray to white.
• Both lane lines must be detected
for the system to fully activate.
• If you cross a lane line, the lane
line you cross will blink (yellow) on
the LCD display.
• If the steering wheel appears, the
system will control the vehicle’s
steering to prevent the vehicle from
crossing the lane line.
If all the conditions to activate LKAS
is not satisfied, the system will con-
vert to LDWS (Lane Departure
Warning System) and warn the driv-
er only when the driver crosses the
lane lines.
Driving your vehicle
■ Left lane line ■ Right lane line
OAEE056127L/OAEE056128L
■ Left lane line ■ Right lane line
OAEE056125L/OAEE056126L
5-63
Driving your vehicle
Keep hands on steering wheel
If the driver takes their hands off the
steering wheel for several seconds
while the LKAS is activated, the sys-
tem will warn the driver with a visual
and audible warning.
Driver's grasp not detected.
LKAS will be disabled momentarily
If the driver still does not have their
hands on the steering wheel after
several seconds, the system will not
control the steering wheel and warn
the driver only when the driver cross-
es the lane lines.
However, if the driver has their hands
on the steering wheel again, the sys-
tem will start controlling the steering
wheel.
Information
• Even though the steering is assisted
by the system, the driver can still
steer to control the steering wheel.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier
when the steering wheel is assisted
by the system than when it is not.
i
5
OAEE056129L OAEE056130L
The warning message may
appear late according to road
conditions. Therefore, always
have your hands on the steering
wheel while driving.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for
accurate steering.
• Turn off the system and drive
the vehicle in below situa-
tions.
- In bad weather
- In bad road condition
- When the steering wheel
needs to be controlled by the
driver frequently.
WARNING
5-64
The LKAS system will not be in the
ENABLED state and the steering
wheel will not be assisted when:
• Vehicle speed is below 60 km/h (37
mph) and over 180 km/h (112
mph).
• Only one lane line is detected.
• The turn signal is turned on before
changing a lane. If you change
lanes without the turn signal on,
the steering wheel might be con-
trolled.
• The hazard warning flasher is on.
• The width of the lane is below 2.6m
(8.5 feet) and over 4.5m (15 feet).
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or
VSM (Vehicle Stability Management)
is activated.
• The vehicle is driven on a sharp
curve.
• The vehicle brakes suddenly.
• The vehicle makes sharp lane
changes.
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road. (e.g. construction area)
• The vehicle is driven on a steep
incline.
Information
When the system is turned on or right
after changing a lane, drive in the
middle of the lane. If not, the system
will not provide steering assist func-
tion.
Warning light and message
Check LKAS
If there is a problem with the system
a message will appear for a few sec-
onds. If the problem continues the
LKAS failure indicator will illuminate.
i
Driving your vehicle
OAEE056131L
5-65
Driving your vehicle
LKAS failure indicator
The LKAS failure indica-
tor (yellow) will illuminate
if the LKAS is not working
properly. We recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
When there is a problem with the
system do one of the following:
• Turn the system on after turning
the vehicle off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check if the system is affected by
the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,
etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on
the camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
LKAS function change
The driver can change LKAS to Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
or change the LKAS mode between
Standard LKA and Active LKA from
the LCD display. Go to the 'User
Settings → Driving Assist → Lane
Keeping Assist System → Lane
Departure/Standard LKA/ Active
LKA'.
The system is automatically set to
Standard LKA if a function is not
selected.
Lane Departure
LDWS alerts the driver with a visual
warning and a warning alarm when
the system detects the vehicle depart-
ing the lane. The steering wheel will
not be controlled.
Standard LKA
The Standard LKA mode guides the
driver to keep the vehicle within the
lanes. It rarely controls the steering
wheel, when the vehicle drives well
inside the lanes. However, it starts to
control the steering wheel, when the
vehicle is about to deviate out of the
lanes.
Active LKA
The Active LKA mode provides more
frequent steering wheel control in
comparison with the Standard LKA
mode. The driver may not feel the
onset of the steering wheel control,
because the Active LKA may be con-
stantly controlling the steering with
lighter corrections.
5
5-66
Limitations of the System
The LKAS may operate prematurely
even if the vehicle does not depart
from the intended lane, OR, the
LKAS may not warn you if the vehicle
leaves the intended lane under the
following circumstances:
• The lanes ahead are not visible
due to rain, snow, water on the
road, damaged or stained road
surface, or other factors.
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or
exiting a tunnel.
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to direct sunlight.
• It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marking from the road surface or
the lane marking is faded or not
clearly marked.
• Driving on a steep grade, over a
hill, or when driving on a curved
road.
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road.
• The windshield or the LKAS cam-
era lens is blocked with dirt or
debris.
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare.
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone.
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road in front of you.
• The lane line is merged or divided.
(e.g. tollgate)
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane marker are
crossing complicatedly.
• The lane markings are not clearly
visible from the road.
• The shadow is on the lane marker
by a median strip.
• The lane width is too wide or too
narrow. See previous page.
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed.
• There are markings on the road
surface that look like a lane line
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier, guardrail and reflector post
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• There is not enough distance
between you and the vehicle in
front to be able to detect the lane
line or the vehicle ahead is driving
on the lane line.
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving.
Driving your vehicle
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
Speed Limit Control operation
You can set the speed limit when you
do not want to drive over a specific
speed.
If you drive over the preset speed
limit, the warning system operates
(set speed limit will blink and chime
will sound) until the vehicle speed
returns within the speed limit.
Information
While speed limit control is in opera-
tion, the cruise control system cannot
be activated.
Speed limit control switch
: Changes mode between cruise
control/smart cruise control
system and speed limit control
system.
RES+: Resumes or increases speed
limit control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit
control speed.
O: Cancels set speed limit.
To set speed limit
1. Press the button to turn the
system on. The speed limit indica-
tor in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
i
SSPPEEEEDD LLIIMMIITT CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAE056152L OAE056068L
System off
Speed Limit Control
Cruise Control/Smart
Cruise Control
5-68
Driving your vehicle
2. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-).
3. • Push the toggle switch up
(RES+) or down (SET-), and
release it at the desired speed.
• Push the toggle switch up
(RES+) or down (SET-) and hold
it. The speed will increase or
decrease by 5 km/h.
The set speed limit will display on the
instrument cluster.
If you would like to drive over the pre-
set speed limit when you depress the
accelerator pedal less than approxi-
mately 50%, the vehicle speed will
maintain within speed limit.
However if you depress the acceler-
ator pedal more than approximately
70%, you can drive over the speed
limit. Then the set speed limit will
blink and chime will sound until you
return the vehicle speed within the
speed limit.
To turn off the speed limit con-
trol, do one of the following:
• Press the button.
• If you press O (cancel) button
once, the set speed limit will can-
cel, but it will not turn the system
off. If you wish to resume the speed
limit, push the +RES or SET- tog-
gle switch on your steering wheel
to your desired speed.
OAE056069L
OAE056068L
5-69
Driving your vehicle
5
Cruise Control operation
1. Cruise indicator
2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows you
to drive at speeds above 30 km/h
(20 mph) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Take the following precautions:
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit in your
country.
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
(cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illumi-
nated) the Cruise Control can
be activated unintentionally.
Keep the Cruise Control sys-
tem off (cruise indicator light
OFF) when the Cruise Control
is not in use, to avoid inadver-
tently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas
WARNING
OAE056067
OAE056194L
■ Except Europe
■ For Europe
5-70
Driving your vehicle
Information
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is oper-
ating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the vehicle.
Cruise control switch
CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control
operation.
CRUISE / : Turns cruise control
system on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
Information
First, switch the mode to Cruise
Control by pressing the button if
equipped with the Speed Limit
Control System.
The mode changes, as below, whenev-
er the button is pressed.
ii
OAE056068L
OAE056153L
■ Type A
■ Type B
System off Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Press the CRUISE / button on
the steering wheel to turn the sys-
tem on. The cruise indicator will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
3. Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and hold it, while monitor-
ing the SET speed on the instru-
ment cluster.
Release the toggle switch when
the desired speed is shown and
the vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase
2.0 km/h (1.2 mph) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
i
OAE056154L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE056156L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE056155L
■ Type A
■ Type B
5-72
Driving your vehicle
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch (1) down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will
gradually slow down. Release the
toggle switch at the speed you
want to maintain.
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
2.0 km/h (1.2 mph) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch (1)
down (SET-).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
OAE056155L
■ Type A
■ Type B
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL / O button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the CRUISE / button.
Both the indicator and the SET
indicator will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than the memory speed by
approximately 20 km/h (12 mph).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 30 km/h
(20 mph).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to 2
nd
gear when in
Manual Shift mode.
Information
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but only pressing the
CRUISE / button will turn the sys-
tem off. If you wish to resume Cruise
Control operation, push the toggle
switch up (RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed, unless the
system was turned off using the
CRUISE / button.
To resume preset Cruising
speed
Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over
30 km/h (20 mph), the vehicle will
resume the preset speed.
i
OAE056157L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE056156L
■ Type A
■ Type B
5-74
Driving your vehicle
To turn Cruise Control off
• Press the CRUISE / button (the
cruise ( ) indicator light
will go off).
• Press the button (The
( ) indicator light will go
off.).
- With the Cruise Control on,
pressing the button once will turn
Off the Cruise Control and turn
on the Speed Limit Control.
- With the Cruise Control off and
Speed Limit Control on, pressing
the button will turn off both sys-
tem.
Information
The mode changes, as below, whenev-
er the button is pressed.
i
OAE056154L
■ Type A
■ Type B
System off Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
5-75
Driving your vehicle
5
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ Set speed
➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The SCC screen will appear on the
SCC/LKAS screen of the LCD dis-
play if the system is activated.
The Smart Cruise Control System
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and dis-
tance detecting the vehicle ahead
without depressing the accelerator/
brake pedal.
SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD055056/OAE056097
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using the
Smart Cruise Control system.
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control
System is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Take the following precautions :
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit in your
country.
• If the Smart Cruise Control is
left on, (cruise ( )
indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated)
the Smart Cruise Control can
be activated unintentionally.
Keep the Smart Cruise
Control System off (cruise
( ) indicator light
OFF) when the Smart Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Smart Cruise Control
System only when traveling
on open highways in good
weather.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-76
Driving your vehicle
Smart cruise control switch
CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control
operation.
CRUISE / : Turns cruise control
system on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance.
Information
First, switch the mode to Smart
Cruise Control by pressing the
button if equipped with the Speed
Limit Control System.
The mode changes, as below, whenev-
er the button is pressed.
i
OAE056169L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE056068L
System off Smart Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
(Continued)
• Do not use the Smart Cruise
Control when it may not be
safe to keep the vehicle at a
constant speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas
- When driving in parking lots
- When driving near crash
barriers
- When driving on a sharp
curve
- When driving with limited
view (possibly due to bad
weather, such as fog, snow,
rain or sandstorm)
- When the vehicle sensing
ability decreases due to
vehicle modification result-
ing level difference of the
vehicle's front and rear
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
To adjust the sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed when
following the front vehicle to maintain
the set distance can be adjusted on
the LCD display.
Cluster type A
'User Settings → Driving Assist →
Smart Cruise Control → Response
→ Slow/Normal/Fast'
Cluster type B
'User Settings → Driving Assist →
Smart Cruise Control Response →
Slow/Normal/Fast'
You may select one of the three
stages you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal.
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
Information
The last selected smart cruise control
speed is remained in the system.
To convert to Cruise Control
mode
The driver may choose to only use
the Cruise Control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
1. Turn the Smart Cruise Control
System on (the cruise indicator
light will be on but the system will
not be activated).
2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-
Vehicle Distance button for more
than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "SCC Mode
(Smart Cruise Control)" and "CC
Mode (Cruise Control)".
When the system is canceled using
the CRUISE/ button or the
CRUISE/ button is used after the
engine is turned on, the Smart
Cruise Control mode will turn on.
i
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE056099L/OAE056077L
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Smart Cruise Control speed
To set Smart Cruise Control
speed
1. Push the CRUISE/ button on
the steering wheel to turn the sys-
tem on. The cruise ( )
indicator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The Smart Cruise Control speed
can be set as follows:
• 30 km/h (20 mph)~180 km/h
(110 mph) : when there is no
vehicle in front
• 10 km/h (5 mph)~180 km/h (110
mph) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it at the
desired speed. The Set Speed
and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
on the LCD display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automati-
cally be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OAE056154L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE056155L
■ Type A
■ Type B
When using the Cruise Control
mode, you must manually
adjust the distance to other
vehicles by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal. The
system does not automatically
adjust the distance to vehicles
in front of you.
WARNING
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
Vehicle speed may decrease on an
upward slope and increase on a down-
ward slope.
To increase Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and hold it. Your vehicle set speed
will increase by 10 km/h (5 mph).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase by
1 km/h (1 mph) each time you
move the toggle switch up in this
manner.
• You can set the speed to 180 km/h
(110 mph).
i
OAE056156L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Check the driving condition
before using the toggle switch.
Driving speed sharply increas-
es, when you push up and hold
the toggle switch.
CAUTION
When vehicle speed is under 10
km/h (6mph), the Smart Cruise
Control is canceled. The driver
must adjust the vehicle speed
by depressing the accelerator
or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driv-
ing condition.
CAUTION
5-80
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set
speed will decrease by 10 km/h (5
mph). Release the toggle switch at
the speed you want.
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1 km/h (1 mph) each time you
move the toggle switch down in
this manner.
• You can set the speed to 30 km/h
(20 mph).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Smart Cruise Control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the Smart Cruise Control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with Smart Cruise Control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-
ing speed will be set again pedal.
Information
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not con-
trolled automatically at this time even
if there is a vehicle in front of you.
Smart Cruise Control will be
temporarily canceled when:
Cancelled manually
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL/ button
located on the steering wheel.
• Depress the brake pedal and press
the CANCEL/ button at the
same time, when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
The Smart Cruise Control turns off
temporarily when the Set Speed and
Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator
on the LCD display turns off.
The cruise ( ) indicator is
illuminated continuously.
i
OAE056157L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAE056155L
■ Type A
■ Type B
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The parking brake is applied.
• The vehicle speed is under 10 km/h
(5 mph).
• The vehicle speed is over 190
km/h (120 mph).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control
System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than one
minute.
• The SCC system has malfunc-
tioned.
• The engine performance is abnor-
mal.
• The AEB is activated.
Each of these actions will cancel
the Smart Cruise Control opera-
tion. The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-
Vehicle Distance on the LCD dis-
play will go off.
In a condition the Smart Cruise
Control is cancelled automatically,
the Smart Cruise Control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- toggle switch is pushed.
Information
If the Smart Cruise Control is can-
celled by other than the reasons men-
tioned, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Smart Cruise Control cancelled
If the system is cancelled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
i
OAE056165L
5-82
Driving your vehicle
To resume Smart Cruise Control
set speed
If any method other than the cruise
toggle switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
push the toggle switch up (RES+) or
down (SET-).
If you push the toggle switch up
(RES+), the speed will resume to the
recently set speed. However, if vehi-
cle speed drops between 10 km/h to
30 km/h (5 mph to 20 mph), it will
resume when there is a vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
Information
Always check the road conditions
when you push the toggle switch up
(RES+) to resume speed.
To turn Cruise Control off
• Press the CRUISE/ button (the
cruise ( ) indicator light
will go off).
• Press the button (The
( ) indicator light will go
off.).
- With the Smart Cruise Control
on, pressing the button once will
turn Off the Smart Cruise Control
and turn on the Speed Limit
Control.
- With the Smart Cruise Control off
and Speed Limit Control on,
pressing the button will turn off
both system.
Information
The mode changes, as below, whenev-
er the button is pressed.
i
i
OAE056154L
■ Type A
■ Type B
System off Smart Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-
to-Vehicle Distance
To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance
When the Smart Cruise Control
System is ON, you can set and main-
tain the distance from the vehicle
ahead of you without pressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 90 km/h
(56 mph), the distance maintain as
follows:
Distance 4 - approximately 52.5 m
Distance 3 - approximately 40 m
Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m
Distance 1 - approximately 25 m
Information
The distance is set to the last set dis-
tance when the system is used for the
first time after starting the engine.
When the lane ahead is clear:
The vehicle speed will maintain the
set speed.
i
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAD055081/OAEE056135
OAE056158L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
5-84
Driving your vehicle
When using the Smart Cruise
Control System:
• The warning chime sounds
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle
Distance indicator blinks if
the vehicle is unable to main-
tain the selected distance
from the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
depress the accelerator or
brake pedal to actively adjust
the vehicle speed, and the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
WARNING
OAD055063
■ Type A
Distance 4 Distance 3
OAD055059/OAD055060/OAD055061/OAD055062
■ Type B
Distance 4 Distance 3
Distance 1
Distance 2
OAEE056136/OAEE056137/OAEE056138/OAEE056139
Distance 1
Distance 2
When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:
• Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected
distance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruis-
ing speed after accelerating to the set speed.
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
Sensor to detect distance to
the vehicle ahead
The Smart Cruise Control uses a
sensor to detect distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
Warning message
Smart Cruise Control disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor lens cover is
blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the
Smart Cruise Control System opera-
tion may stop temporarily. If this
occurs, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display. Remove
any dirt, snow, or debris and clean
the radar sensor lens cover before
operating the Smart Cruise Control
System. The Smart Cruise Control
system may not properly activate, if
the radar is totally contaminated, or if
any substance is not detected after
turning ON the engine (e.g. in an open
terrain).
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 30km/h) disap-
pears to the next lane, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a mes-
sage "Watch for surrounding
vehicles" will appear. Adjust
your vehicle speed for vehicles
or objects that can suddenly
appear in front of you by
depressing the brake pedal.
Always pay attention to the road
condition ahead.
CAUTION
OAE056168L
OAE056028
OAE056166L
5-86
Driving your vehicle
Check Smart Cruise Control System
The message will appear when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
We recommend that you take your
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
(Continued)
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around
the radar sensor, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate properly. We rec-
ommend you to have the vehi-
cle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a
damaged sensor or sensor
cover. Do not apply paint to
the sensor cover.
OAE056167L
• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing so may
adversely affect the sensing
performance of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and lens cover clean and free
of dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash
the vehicle. Do not spray pres-
surized water directly on the
sensor or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unnec-
essary force on the radar sen-
sor or sensor cover. If the sen-
sor is forcibly moved out of
proper alignment, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
CAUTION
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitations of the system
The Smart Cruise Control System
may have limits to its ability to detect
distance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
On curves
• The Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and
select the appropriate set speed.
Check to be sure that the road con-
ditions permit safe operation of the
Smart Cruise Control.
OAE056101
OAE056100
5-88
Driving your vehicle
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and cause your vehicle
to accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and apply the brake or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The radar may not detect immedi-
ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a slower vehicle moves into your
lane, your speed may decrease to
maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a faster vehicle which moves into
your lane, your vehicle will acceler-
ate to the set speed.
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles in your lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
OAE056104OAE056103OAE056102
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
luggage compartment
- While the steering wheel is operat-
ing
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Apply the brake or accelerator pedal
if necessary.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
• When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of
you merges out of the lane, the
system may not immediately
detect the new vehicle that is now
in front of you. In this case, you
must maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and if necessary, depress
the brake pedal to reduce your
driving speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
OAE056109OAE056108
5-90
Driving your vehicle
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out from the
back of the vehicle.
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following pre-
cautions:
• If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes. The vehicle cannot be
stopped at every emergency
situation by using the Smart
Cruise Control System.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
(Continued)
WARNING
OAE056105OAE056110
5-91
Driving your vehicle
The Smart Cruise Control System
may not operate temporarily due
to:
• Electrical interference
• Modifying the suspension
• Differences of tire abrasion or
tire pressure
• Installing different type of tires
NOTICE
5
(Continued)
• The Smart Cruise Control
System cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
• Vehicles moving in front of you
with a frequent lane change
may cause a delay in the sys-
tem's reaction or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle
actually in an adjacent lane.
Always drive cautiously to pre-
vent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
• Always be aware of the select-
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System may not recognize
complex driving situations so
always pay attention to driv-
ing conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
5-92
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
bellow suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear.
Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-
essary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional trac-
tion while the vehicle becomes
stuck in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a for-
ward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission while driving on
slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous -
you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehi-
cle, the vehicle can overheat
quickly, possibly causing an
engine compartment fire or
other damage. Try to avoid spin-
ning the wheels as much as
possible to prevent overheating
of either the tires or the engine.
DO NOT allow the vehicle to
spin the wheels above 56 km/h
(35 mph).
WARNING
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
The ESC system (if equipped) must be
turned OFF before rocking the vehi-
cle.
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, pos-
sible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at night
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increas-
es the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if
equipped)
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
NOTICE
i
5-94
Driving your vehicle
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driv-
ing until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increas-
es as the depth of tire tread
decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
fail the braking operation.
Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as speci-
fied on your tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the high-
way consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
i
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:
Information
Information for Snow Tires and Tire
Chains in the national language
(Bulgarian, Hungarian, Icelandic,
Polish) is provided in the Appendix.
Snow or icy conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause the vehicle to skid.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Information
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local and municipal regula-
tions for possible restrictions against
their use.
i
i
WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
WARNING
5-96
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
Information
• Install tire chains only in pairs and
on the front tires. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the
tires will provide a greater driving
force, but will not prevent side
skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local and municipal
regulations for possible restrictions
against their use.
i
OAE056091
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling:
• Drive less than 30 km/h (20
mph) or the chain manufactur-
er's recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
WARNING
5-97
Driving your vehicle
5
Chain Installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chas-
sis, stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.5~1.0 km (0.3~0.6 miles).
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 12 mm
(0.47 in) thick to prevent damage
to the chain's connection.
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
NOTICE
5-98
Driving your vehicle
Check battery and cables
The winter temperature increases
the battery consumption. Inspect
the battery and cables, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. The battery
charging level can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or in a
service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some regions during winter, it is
recommended to use the "winter
weight" oil with lower viscosity. For
further information, refer to the chap-
ter 8. When you are not sure about a
type of winter weight oil, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect the spark plugs, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. If necessary,
replace them. Also check all ignition
wirings and components for any
cracks, wear-out, and damage.
To prevent locks from freezing
To prevent the locks from being
frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid
or glycerin into key holes. When a
lock opening is already covered with
ice, spray approved de-icing fluid
over the ice to remove it. When an
internal part of a lock freezes, try to
thaw it with a heated key. Carefully
use the heated key to avoid an injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze solution in system
To prevent the window washer from
being frozen, add authorized window
washer anti-freeze solution, as spec-
ified on the window washer contain-
er. Window washer anti-freeze solu-
tion is available from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, and so are the
most vehicle accessory outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types
of anti-freeze solution to prevent any
damage to the vehicle paint.
5-99
Driving your vehicle
5
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. When
there is the risk that your parking
brake may freeze, temporarily apply
it with the shift lever in P (Park). Also,
block the rear wheels in advance, so
the vehicle may not roll. Then,
release the parking brake.
Do not let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in such conditions during the
severe winter, you should check
underneath the vehicle on a regular
basis, so that moving the front
wheels and the steering components
is unblocked.
Carry emergency equipment
In accordance with weather condi-
tions, you should carry appropriate
emergency equipment, while driving.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables,
window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Do not place objects or materials
in the engine compartment
Putting objects or materials in the
engine compartment may cause an
engine failure or combustion,
because those may block the engine
cooling. Such damage will not be
covered by the manufacturer's war-
ranty.
5-100
Driving your vehicle
Two labels on your driver’s door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiar-
ize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle's weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-
tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.
Overloading
VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWEEIIGGHHTT
The Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the Certification
Label attached to the driver's
(or front passenger’s) door.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weighing
the items (and people) before
putting them in the vehicle. Be
careful not to overload your
vehicle.
WARNING
5-101
Driving your vehicle
5
TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG
We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.
What to do in an emergency
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2
If the engine stalls while driving...................................6-2
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-2
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-3
If the engine will not start ...................................6-4
If the engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly...............................................................6-4
If the engine turns over normally but
doesn't start .......................................................................6-4
Jump starting ..........................................................6-4
If the engine overheats ........................................6-8
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)........6-10
Check tire pressure ........................................................6-10
Tire pressure monitoring system................................6-11
Low tire pressure telltale..............................................6-12
Low tire pressure position and
tire pressure telltale .......................................................6-12
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator .....................................................6-13
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-14
If you have a flat tire..........................................6-16
Jack and tools ..................................................................6-16
Changing tires ..................................................................6-17
Jack label...........................................................................6-22
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-23
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)........................................6-24
Towing ...................................................................6-32
Towing service .................................................................6-32
Removable towing hook ................................................6-33
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-34
Emergency commodity........................................6-36
Fire extinguisher .............................................................6-36
First aid kit........................................................................6-36
Triangle reflector ............................................................6-36
Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-36
6
6-2
The hazard warning flasher serves as
a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button with the ignition switch
in any position. The button is located
in the center fascia panel. All turn
signal lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
If the engine stalls while driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.
• Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR
What to do in an emergency
IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY
W
WHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
OAE066001
6-3
What to do in an emergency
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P (Park),
apply the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
6
6-4
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT
What to do in an emergency
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
• Be sure the shift lever is in P
(Park). The vehicle starts only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
If the engine turns over nor-
mally but doesn't start
• Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic convert-
er to overload which can lead to
damage to the emission control
system.
CAUTION
JJUUMMPP SSTTAARRTTIINNGG
6-5
What to do in an emergency
6
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always pres-
ent in battery cells, is
highly combustible, and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
6-6
What to do in an emergency
To prevent damage to your vehicle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brakes. Turn
both vehicles OFF.
Information
Your vehicle has a battery in the trunk
compartment.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
i
i
NOTICE
Pb
OAE066004
6-7
What to do in an emergency
7. Connect the other end of the sec-
ond jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-
utes. Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, neg-
ative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
6
6-8
What to do in an emergency
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be over-
heating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)
and set the parking brake
3. Make sure that there is no hot
steam gushing out of the engine
compartment. When it is safe to
do so, open the engine compart-
ment, and check the water-pump
connector. When the water-pump
connector is disconnected, stop
the engine, re-connect the water-
pump connector, and then re-start
the engine.
4. Set the temperature and the air
flow to the maximum, and turn ON
the air conditioner.
5. When the Service warning light
( ) illuminates on the instru-
ment cluster, immediately stop the
engine, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. When the
engine warning light ( ) illumi-
nates, or when the coolant or hot
steams gush out of the engine
compartment, leave the engine
compartment opened, while run-
ning the engine. This is to ventilate
the engine compartment and to
cool down the engine.
6. Check the coolant temperature
gauge on the instrument cluster to
make sure the coolant temperature
is sufficiently cooled down. Check
the coolant level. When it is insuffi-
cient, check its connection with the
radiator, the heater hose, and the
water pump for any leakage. When
there is no leakage, add the
coolant. However, if the problems
persists, such as the illumination of
the warning lights, leakages, or the
cooling-fan malfunction, which may
overheat the engine, immediately
stop the engine, and have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the mov-
ing parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
OAE066005
6-9
What to do in an emergency
6
7. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
8. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
• Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates a leak in the cooling
system and we recommend
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
CAUTION
NEVER remove the
radiator cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclock-
wise to remove it.
WARNING
6-10
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS
Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale and Tire Pressure Telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
(if equipped)
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Information Mode (for cluster
type A) or Assist Mode (for cluster
type B) on the cluster.
Refer to the “LCD modes” in
chapter 3.
• Tire pressure is displayed after a
few minutes of driving after initial
engine start up.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive
to display" message will appear.
After driving, check the tire pres-
sure.
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings mode on
the LCD display.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).
TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
What to do in an emergency
OAE066006
■ Type A
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type B
OAE046114L/OAE046115L
OAE046460L/OAE066030L
6-11
What to do in an emergency
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
cle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
6
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
6-12
If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale/
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
does not illuminate for 3 sec-
onds when the ignition switch
is placed to the ON position or
engine is running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure position and
tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The Low Tire
Pressure Position Telltale will indi-
cate which tire is significantly under-
inflated by illuminating the corre-
sponding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on and the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may blink for one minute
and then remain illuminated (when
the vehicle is driven approximately
20 minutes at speed above 25 km/h
(15.5 mph)) until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
Information
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
i
NOTICE
What to do in an emergency
■ Type A ■ Type B
OAE046114L/OAE046115L
6-13
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the Low Tire Pressure
Position Telltale will not be dis-
played even though the vehicle
has an under-inflated tire.
NOTICE
6
In winter or cold weather, the
Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
be illuminated if the tire pres-
sure was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a propor-
tional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-14
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic
devices such as computers, charg-
ers, remote starters, navigation,
etc. This may interfere with normal
operation of the TPMS.
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible or replace the
flat tire with the spare tire.
The spare tire (if equipped) does not
come with a tire pressure monitoring
sensor. When the low pressure tire or
the flat tire is replaced with the spare
tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on. Also, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is driven at
speed above 25 km/h (15.5 mph) for
approximately 20 minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pres-
sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go
off within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicators do not extinguish
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
You may not be able to identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure. Please
note that a tire that is hot (from being
driven) will have a higher pressure
measurement than a tire that is cold.
NOTICE
What to do in an emergency
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI deal-
er may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
CAUTION
6-15
What to do in an emergency
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
6
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING
For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle; it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
•
If you use the wheels on the mar-
ket, use a TPMS sensor approved
by a HYUNDAI de
aler. If your
vehicle is not equipped with a
TPMS sensor or TPMS does not
work properly, you may fail the
periodic vehicle inspection con-
ducted in your country.
❈❈
All vehicles sold in the EUROPE
market during below period
must be equipped with TPMS.
- New model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehi-
cle registrations)
WARNING
6-16
What to do in an emergency
Jack and tools
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same com-
partment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from "rattling", store them in their
proper location.
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE
OAD065027
OAD065026
Changing a tire can be danger-
ous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.
CAUTION
6-17
What to do in an emergency
6
Changing tires
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle's tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park),
apply the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety pre-
cautions:
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a
level, firm place off the road,
call a towing service for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the jack pro-
vided with the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking sup-
port.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
6-18
What to do in an emergency
5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
7. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are chang-
ing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches and two dimples.
Never jack any other position or
part of the vehicle. It may damage
to the side seal molding.
OAE066010
BB
BB
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
OAE066011 OAE066012
■ Front ■ Rear
6-19
What to do in an emergency
6
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from
the studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-
gers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts clos-
est to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle coun-
terclockwise.
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, we recommend
that an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer tighten the lug nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possi-
ble. The wheel lug nut should
be tightened to 11~13 kgf.m
(79~94 lbf.ft).
OAE066013 OAE066011
6-20
What to do in an emergency
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control pos-
sibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the com-
pact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid fail-
ure of the compact spare tire.
WARNING
If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see "Tires and
Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure
instructions.). If the pressure is lower
or higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper stor-
age locations.
Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a spare
tire. Adjust it to the recommended
pressure.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-
ment is damaged or in poor condi-
tion, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
Check and tighten the tire wheel lug
nuts after driving over 50km if tires
are replaced. Re-check the tire
wheel lug nuts after driving over
1,000km.
Use of compact spare tires
(if equipped)
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
NOTICE
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub. We
recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION
6-21
What to do in an emergency
6
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire's tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 11~13 kgf.m
(79~94 lbf.ft).
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the com-
pact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diame-
ter is smaller than the diame-
ter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 25 mm (1 inch).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the com-
pact spare wheel.
CAUTION
6-22
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehi-
cles with manual transmission or
move the shift lever to the P posi-
tion on vehicles with dual clutch
transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
What to do in an emergency
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
OHYK065011
6-23
What to do in an emergency
6
JACKDOC14S
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack
6-24
What to do in an emergency
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix
to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The compressor and sealing com-
pound system effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails or
similar objects and reinflates the tire.
OAE066007
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may lose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
WARNING
OAE066029
OAEE066002
■ For 15 inch tire
■ For 17 inch tire
6-25
What to do in an emergency
6
After you ensure that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously
on the tire (distance up to 200 km
(120 miles)) at a max. speed of (80
km/h (50mph)) in order to reach a
service station or tire dealer for the
tire replacement.
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is
heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 inch).
Please contact the nearest
HYUNDAI dealership if the tire
cannot be made roadworthy with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 minutes at a
time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below
-30°C (-22°F).
6-26
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for power
outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. ON/OFF switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-
tion pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape
under high pressure.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
■ For 15 inch tire
OGDE064102/OEL069020
■ For 17 inch tire
6-27
What to do in an emergency
6
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
Do not use the tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
Detach the speed restriction
label (0) from the sealant bottle
(1), and place it in a highly visi-
ble place inside the vehicle
such as on the steering wheel
to remind the driver not to drive
too fast.
WARNING
OLMF064103
OAE066014
6-28
What to do in an emergency
2. Screw the connection hose (9)
onto the connector of the sealant
bottle.
3. Ensure that the screw cap (8) is
closed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the flat tire and screw the
filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle
onto the valve.
Securely install the sealant fill-
ing hose to the valve. If not,
sealant may flow backward,
possibly clogging the filling
hose.
CAUTION
OAE066027
OAEE066004 OAE066017
6-29
What to do in an emergency
6
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cord
(3) into the vehicle power outlet.
8. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (Refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kpa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
OAE066016
OAEE066007
OLMF064105
■ For 15 inch tire
■ For 17 inch tire
6-30
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or about 10
minutes) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be damaged by sealant, have it
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
1. After driving approximately 7~10 km
(4~6 miles or about 10 minutes),
stop at a safe location.
2. Connect hose (9) of the compres-
sor directly to the tire valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure:
Switch on the compressor, posi-
tion to [I]. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure:
Loosen the screw cap (8) on the
compressor hose.
Information
The pressure gauge may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire pressure, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
i
OAD065014
OLMF064106
6-31
What to do in an emergency
6
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit
including sealant not approved by
HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sen-
sors may be damaged by sealant.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel should be
removed when you replace the
tire with a new one and inspect
the tire pressure sensors at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION
6-32
What to do in an emergency
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
TTOOWWIINNGG
OAE066018
Dolly
Dolly
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OAE066020
OAE066019
6-33
What to do in an emergency
6
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
OAE066021
OAE066022
OAE066028
■ Front
■ Rear
6-34
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-
cial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook at the front (or rear) of the
vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Always follow these emergency tow-
ing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the ACC
position so the steering wheel is
not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking perform-
ance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
OAE066024
OAE066023
■ Front
■ Rear
6-35
What to do in an emergency
6
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12
inches) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the dual clutch
transmission for fluid leaks under
your vehicle. If the dual clutch trans-
mission fluid is leaking, flatbed
equipment or a towing dolly must be
used.
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks
to pull a vehicle out of mud,
sand or other conditions from
which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own
power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
15 km/h (10 mph) and drive
less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when
towing to avoid serious dam-
age to the dual clutch trans-
mission.
CAUTION
OAE066025
6-36
What to do in an emergency
Your vehicle is equipped with emer-
gency commodities to help you
respond to emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, fol-
low these steps carefully.
1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of
the extinguisher that keeps the
handle from being accidentally
pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle towards the base
of the fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze
the handle to discharge the extin-
guisher. If you release the handle,
the discharge will stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth
at the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch carefully
since it may re-ignite.
First aid kit
Supplies for use in giving first aid
such as scissors, bandage and
adhesive tape, etc. are provided.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the
road to warn oncoming vehicles dur-
ing emergencies, such as when the
vehicle is parked by the roadside due
to problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(if equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-
to-day use, and you may have to add
a air periodically and usually it is not
a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal
wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire
pressure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the
following steps:
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the
tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will leak as
you begin and more will leak if you
don't press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will acti-
vate the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to see whether the tire pres-
sure is low or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressure to the
specified pressure. Refer to "Tires
and Wheels" in chapter 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY CCOOMMMMOODDIITTYY ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
7
Maintenance
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance services ...........................................7-4
Owner's responsibility......................................................7-4
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-4
Owner maintenance...............................................7-5
Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-5
Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items...7-20
Engine oil ..............................................................7-22
Checking the engine oil level.......................................7-22
Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-23
Engine coolant/inverter coolant .......................7-24
Checking the coolant level ...........................................7-24
Changing coolant.............................................................7-27
Hybrid starter & generator (HSG) belt.............7-28
Checking the hybrid starter &
generator (HSG) belt......................................................7-28
Brake fluid ............................................................7-28
Checking the brake fluid level .....................................7-28
Washer fluid .........................................................7-29
Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-29
Parking brake .......................................................7-30
Checking the parking brake .........................................7-30
Air cleaner ............................................................7-30
Filter replacement ..........................................................7-30
Climate control air filter .....................................7-32
Filter inspection...............................................................7-32
Wiper blades.........................................................7-34
Blade inspection ..............................................................7-34
Blade replacement ..........................................................7-34
Battery (12 volt) ..................................................7-37
For best battery service................................................7-38
Battery capacity label....................................................7-38
Battery recharging .........................................................7-39
Reset features .................................................................7-40
7
Tires and wheels..................................................7-41
Tire care............................................................................7-41
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...........7-42
Check tire inflation pressure........................................7-43
Tire rotation .....................................................................7-44
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-45
Tire replacement ............................................................7-45
Wheel replacement.........................................................7-46
Tire traction ....................................................................7-46
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-47
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-47
Low aspect ratio tires....................................................7-51
Fuses......................................................................7-52
Instrument panel fuse replacement ...........................7-53
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.........7-54
Fuse/relay panel description .......................................7-56
Light bulbs.............................................................7-66
Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp
bulb replacement.............................................................7-67
Headlamp aiming .............................................................7-71
Daytime running lamp....................................................7-75
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-75
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-76
Rear fog lamp ..................................................................7-81
High mounted stop lamp ...............................................7-81
License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-81
Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-81
Appearance care..................................................7-83
Exterior care ....................................................................7-83
Interior care......................................................................7-88
Emission control system .....................................7-90
Crankcase emission control system...........................7-90
Evaporative emission control system.........................7-90
Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-91
7-3
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Engine coolant cap
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Inverter coolant reservoir
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Fuse box
OAE076001
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
7-4
Maintenance
M
MAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI’s high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of serv-
ice satisfaction.
Owner’s responsibility
Maintenance service and record reten-
tion are the owner’s responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties cover-
ing the vehicle.
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Service Passport pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you’re
unsure about any service or mainte-
nance procedure, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
7-5
7
Maintenance
OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated
tires.
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS
follow these precautions for
performing maintenance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park) position,
apply the parking brake, place
the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Block the tires (front and back)
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
Remove loose clothing or jew-
elry that can become entan-
gled in moving parts.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-
ing materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
WARNING
7-6
Maintenance
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or loose-
ness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead posi-
tion.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check the dual clutch transmission
P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Fall)
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
7-7
7
Maintenance
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any
of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10miles) in
freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 miles/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition
If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
7-8
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bot-
tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to
use them. Do not mix other additives.
Normal maintenance schedule - For Europe (except Russia)
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Engine oil and engine
oil filter *
1
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter I I R I I R I I
Fuel additives *
2
Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-9
7
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - For Europe (except Russia)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
3
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
4
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
etc, we recommend replacing the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consulting with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
5
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.
If drive belt noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Spark plugs *
3
Replace every 165,000 km (102,500 miles)
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I
Fuel tank air filter I I
Vacuum hose
I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter *
4
I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I
HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt *
5
Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months,
and replace every 105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 48 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-10
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - For Europe (except Russia)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
6
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory.
An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
7
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
8
: Dual clutch transmission (DCT) fluid should be changed anytime it has been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant / Inverter coolant *
6
At first, replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months*
7
Dual clutch transmission fluid *
8
I I
Engine clutch actuator fluid I R I R I R I R
Engine clutch actuator hose and line I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal I I I I
Parking brake I I I I
Brake fluid I R I R I R I R
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-11
7
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - For Europe (except Russia)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter
R R R R
Exhaust system
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-12
Maintenance
Maintenance under severe usage conditions - For Europe (except Russia)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and engine oil filter R
Replace every 7,500 km (4,650 miles)
or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I
HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt
R
Every 45,000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months
C, D, E, K
I
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 12 months
Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
7-13
7
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in heavy dust condition
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly
H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack
I : Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Maintenance under severe usage conditions - For Europe (except Russia)
7-14
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - Except Europe (but include Russia)
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Engine oil and engine
oil filter *
1
For Middle East *
2
,
Central & South
America
Replace every 10,000 km (6,200 miles) or 12 months
Except Middle East *
2
,
Central & South
America
R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter
For Middle East *
2
R R R R R R R R
Except
Middle East *
2
I I R I I R I I
Fuel additives *
3
Add every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2
: Middle East includes Libya, Algeria, Morocco, Tunisia, Sudan, Egypt and Iran.
*
3
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bot-
tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to
use them. Do not mix other additives.
7-15
7
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - Except Europe (but include Russia)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Spark plugs *
4
Replace every 165,000 km (102,500 miles)
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I
Fuel tank air filter I R I R
Vacuum hose
I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter *
5
I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I
HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt *
6
Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months,
and replace every 105,000km (70,000 miles) or 48 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
4
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
5
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob-
lem etc, we recommend replacing the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consulting with an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
6
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.
If drive belt noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
7-16
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - Except Europe (but include Russia)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant / Inverter coolant *
7
At first, replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months*
8
Dual clutch transmission fluid *
9
I I
Engine clutch actuator fluid Replace every 40,000 km (26,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine clutch actuator hose and line I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal I I I I
Parking brake I I I I
Brake fluid I R I R I R I R
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
7
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory.
An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
8
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
9
: Dual clutch transmission (DCT) fluid should be changed anytime it has been submerged in water.
7-17
7
Maintenance
Normal maintenance schedule - Except Europe (but include Russia)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter
R R R R R R R R
Exhaust system
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
7-18
Maintenance
Maintenance under severe usage conditions - Except Europe (but include Russia)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
For Middle East *
1
,
Central & South
America
R
Replace every 5,000 km (3,100 miles)
or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Except Middle East *
1
,
Central & South
America
R
Replace every 7,500 km (4,650 miles)
or 6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I
HSG (Hybrid Starter &
Generator) belt
For Middle East *
1
,
Central & South
America
R
Every 30,000 km (20,000 miles)
or 24 months
C, D, E, K
I Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 12 months
Except Middle East *
1
,
Central & South
America
R
Every 45,000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months
I
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12
months
Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
*
1
: Middle East includes Libya, Algeria, Morocco, Tunisia, Sudan, Egypt and Iran.
7-19
7
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Maintenance under severe usage conditions - Except Europe (but include Russia)
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in heavy dust condition
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly
H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack
I : Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
7-20
Maintenance
E
EXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
HSG (Hybrid starter & genera-
tor) belt
The HSG belt should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. We recommend an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace any dam-
aged or leaking parts immediately.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently. After
installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for
leaks at the connections. Fuel filters
should be installed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure a new vapor
hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.
Air cleaner filter
A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter
is recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Engine coolant/inverter
coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
7-21
7
Maintenance
Dual clutch transmission fluid
The dual clutch transmission fluid
should be inspected according to the
intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Engine clutch actuator fluid
The engine clutch actuator fluid level
should be inspected or replaced to
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between the MIN and the MAX
marks on the side of the reservoir.
Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi-
cation.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads, the disc, and the
rotor for any excessive wear-out.
Inspect calipers for any fluid leakage
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, refer to
the HYUNDAI web site.
(http://ser
vice.hyundai-motor.com)
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and the
hybrid system off, check for exces-
sive free-play in the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
7-22
Maintenance
E
ENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s
precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground in P (Park) with the parking
brake set and the wheels blocked.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
4. Turn the hybrid system off and
wait about five minutes for the oil
to return to the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
6. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F (Full) and L (Low).
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.
To prevent damage to your engine:
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and
recheck level to ensure engine
is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when
adding or changing engine oil.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine
components. Wipe off spilled oil
immediately.
NOTICE
OAE076002
7-23
7
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil
(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities” in chapter 8).
Checking the engine oil and
filter
We recommend that the engine oil
and filter be changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
NOTICE
OAE076003
7-24
Maintenance
E
ENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT//IINNVVEERRTTEERR CCOOOOLLAANNTT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between the MAX and the MIN
marks on the side of the coolant
reservoir when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring
the level to the MAX mark, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, we recommend that you
see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for a cooling system inspection.
OAE076005
OAE076004
■ Engine coolant
■ Inverter coolant
7-25
7
Maintenance
Information
The engine coolant and/or inverter
coolant level is influenced by the
hybrid system temperature. Before
checking or refilling the engine
coolant and/or inverter coolant, turn
the hybrid vehicle off.
i
Never remove the
engine coolant cap
and/or inverter coolant
cap or the drain plug
while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure, causing serious injury.
Turn the hybrid system off and
wait until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the engine coolant cap
and/or inverter coolant cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly
to the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
WARNING
OAE076006
OAE076007
■ Engine coolant cap
■ Inverter coolant cap
7-26
Maintenance
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant tem-
perature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed. As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan blades
of the cooling fan.
WARNING
Make sure the coolant cap is
properly closed after refilling
coolant. Otherwise the engine
could be overheated while driv-
ing.
1. Check if the coolant cap label
is straight In front.
(Continued)
WARNING
OTL075062
■ Engine room front view
(Continued)
2. Make sure that the tiny pro-
trusions inside the coolant
cap is securely interlocked.
OAE076050
■ Engine room rear view
7-27
7
Maintenance
Recommended coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water, distilled water or
soft water for your vehicle and
never mix hard water in the coolant
filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can
result in severe malfunction or
engine/hybrid system damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an phosphate-based
ethylene glycol coolant to prevent
corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixing percentage, refer to the
following table:
Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of
-35°C (-31°F) and higher.
Changing coolant
We recommend that coolant be
changed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.
To prevent damage to engine parts,
put a thick towel around the engine
coolant cap and/or inverter coolant
cap before refilling the coolant to
prevent the coolant from overflow-
ing into engine parts, such as the
generator.
NOTICE
i
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Engine coolant may also cause
damage to paint and body trim.
WARNING
7-28
Maintenance
H
HYYBBRRIIDD SSTTAARRTTEERR && GGEENNEERRAATTOORR ((HHSSGG)) BBEELLTT
Checking the hybrid starter &
generator (HSG) belt
We recommend that you have the
hybrid starter & generator (HSG)
belt inspected or replaced according
to the Maintenance Schedule in this
chapter by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
• Turn the vehicle off while you
inspect the engine or hybrid
starter & generator(HSG) belt.
Otherwise it may result in
serious injury.
• Keep hands, clothing etc.
away from the hybrid starter &
generator (HSG) belt.
WARNING
When the HSG belt is worn out or
damaged, replace the belt.
Otherwise, it may cause engine
overheating or battery discharge.
CAUTION
OAE076008
BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD
7-29
7
Maintenance
If the level is low, add the specified
brake fluid to the MAX level. The level
will fall with accumulated mileage.
This is a normal condition associated
with the wear of the brake linings. If
the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the brake system
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle’s body paint, as
paint damage will result.
• Brake fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an
extended time should NEVER be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be dis-
posed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of
brake fluid. A few drops of miner-
al based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
Information
Use only the specified brake fluid
(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities” in chapter 8).
Checking the washer fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
i
NOTICE
If the brake system requires fre-
quent additions of fluid this
could indicate a leak in the
brake system. We recommend
that the vehicle be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not allow brake fluid to come
in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid comes in contact
with your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least 15
minutes and get immediate
medical attention.
WARNING
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
OAE076009
7-30
Maintenance
Checking the parking brake
Foot type (if equipped)
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 20 kg (44 lb,
196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 4~5 notch
Filter replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
OAE056014
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir. Engine coolant can
severely obscure visibility
when sprayed on the wind-
shield and may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flame
to contact the washer fluid or
the washer fluid reservoir.
Washer fluid may contain
alcohol and can be flamma-
ble.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.
WARNING
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
OAE076010
7-31
7
Maintenance
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
5. Check if the cover is firmly installed.
Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual rec-
ommended intervals (Refer to
“Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions” in this chapter).
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed. This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,
use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
OAE076011
OAE076012
7-32
Maintenance
C
CLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you replace the climate control air fil-
ter, replace it performing the follow-
ing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
1. Remove the support rod (1). 2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
OAE076013 OAE076014
7-33
7
Maintenance
3. Press and hold the lock (1) on
both sides of the cover.
4. Pull out (2) the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (
↓
↓
) facing down-
wards. Otherwise, the climate con-
trol effects may decrease, possi-
bly with a noise.
NOTICE
OHG070041OAE076015
7-34
Maintenance
W
WIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS
Blade inspection
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a clean
cloth dampened with washer fluid.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other compo-
nents, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manu-
ally.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper mal-
function and failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
7-35
7
Maintenance
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Press the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
OLMB073020
OLMB073021
OLMB073022
OLF074017
7-36
Maintenance
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).
Then lift up the wiper blade (2).
3. While pushing the lock (3), pull
down the wiper blade (4).
4. Remove the wiper blade from the
wiper arm (5).
5. Install a new wiper blade assem-
bly in the reverse order of removal.
6. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
OAD075074L
OAD075075L OAD075076L
7-37
7
Maintenance
BBAATTTTEERRYY ((1122 VVOOLLTT))
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always pres-
ent in battery cells, is
highly combustible, and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition switch
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
7-38
Maintenance
• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low tempera-
ture area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-
tery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
Battery capacity label
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
1. AGM60L-DIN : The HYUNDAI
model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 100RC : The nominal reserve
capacity (in min.)
5. 640CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 512A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
NOTICE
OAE076016
OLMB073072
■ Example
7-39
7
Maintenance
Battery recharging
By battery charger
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
Always follow these instructions
when recharging your vehicle’s
battery to avoid the risk of SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH from
explosions or acid burns:
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and place the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF posi-
tion.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
• Always work outdoors or in an
area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the fol-
lowing order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
•
Always use a genuine HYUNDAI
approved battery when you
replace the battery.
7-40
Maintenance
By jump starting
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-
utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle
may not restart if you shut it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See “Jump
Starting” in chapter 6 for more infor-
mation on jump starting procedures.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Reset features
Some items need to be reset after
the battery has been discharged or
the battery has been disconnected.
See chapter 3 for:
• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
• Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof
• Driver Position Memory System
i
7-41
7
Maintenance
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within the
load limits and weight distribution rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
(Continued)
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are dam-
aged. Worn tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering) control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver’s side center pillar. Always
use a tire pressure gauge to
measure tire pressure. Tires
with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-42
Maintenance
All specifications (sizes and pressures)
can be found on a label attached to the
driver’s side center pillar.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Warm tires normally exceed recom-
mended cold tire pressures by 28 to
41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-inflat-
ed. For recommended inflation pres-
sure, refer to “Tire and Wheels” in
chapter 8.
Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long peri-
ods at high speeds.
WARNING
OAE086002L
7-43
7
Maintenance
Check tire inflation pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.
How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflat-
ed when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended pressure. Make sure to
put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or
moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage. If a valve
cap is missing, install a new one as
soon as possible.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.
• Under-inflation results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend it be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-44
Maintenance
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
11~13 kgf·m [79~94 lbf·ft]).
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information
The outside and inside of the unsym-
metrical tire is distinguishable. When
installing an unsymmetrical tire, be
sure to install the side marked "out-
side" face the outside. If the side
marked "inside" is installed on the
outside, it will have a bad effect on
vehicle performance.
i
CBGQ0706
ODH073802
■ With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
■ Without a spare tire
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
7-45
7
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Improper wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle’s aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
NOTICE
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator
To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-46
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
(Continued)
• When replacing tires (or
wheels), it is recommended to
replace the two front or two
rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
• Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning may cause sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.The com-
pact spare tire is for emergency
use only. Do not operate your
vehicle over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when using the compact spare
tire.
WARNING
7-47
7
Maintenance
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
195/65R15 91H
195 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
91 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
OLMB073028
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
7-48
Maintenance
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1516 represents
that the tire was produced in the 15th
week of 2016.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
7-49
7
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D“ means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
7-50
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-51
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tires
A low aspect ratio tire, of which the
aspect ratio is lower than 50, is
designed for a sporty-look vehicle.
The low aspect ratio is to optimize
handling and braking. Thus, it may
be uncomfortable to ride and it may
generate noises, in comparison with
a normal tire.
The side wall of a low aspect
ratio tire is shorter than the nor-
mal one. Thus, the low-aspect
wheel and tire are easily dam-
aged. Follow the below instruc-
tions.
• When driving on a rough road
or driving off a road, be care-
ful not to damage the tires
and wheels. After driving,
inspect the tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or
curb stone, slowly drive the
vehicle not to damage the
tires and wheels.
• When there is an impact on a
tire, inspect the tire condition.
Or, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000 km
(1,800 miles) to prevent a tire
damage.
• It is difficult to recognize a tire
damage only with your eyes.
When there is a slight hint of a
tire damage, check and replace
the tire to prevent the damage
caused by air leakage.
• When a tire is damaged while
driving on a rough road, off a
road, or over obstacles, such
as a pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, your warranty does not
cover the damage.
• The tire information is speci-
fied on the tire side wall.
7
7-52
Maintenance
F
FUUSSEESS
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rat-
ing.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immedi-
ately consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
i
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
Blown
Normal
Blown
Normal
Blown
OLF074075
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION
NEVER replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
WARNING
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
7-53
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuses
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. Spare fuses are pro-
vided in the instrument panel fuse
panels (or in the engine compart-
ment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced with the
same rating.
OAE076017
OAE076018
7
7-54
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, “Turn on
FUSE SWITCH” message will appear.
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the transportation
fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse
switch may be damaged.
Engine compartment panel
fuse replacement
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
NOTICE
i
OAE076023
OAE076024
■ Blade type fuse
■ Cartridge type fuse
OAE076019 OLFH044149L
7-55
7
Maintenance
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. You
may hear a clicking sound if the
cover is securely latched. If it is
not securely latched, electrical
failure may occur from water con-
tact.
Main fuse
The electronic system may not func-
tion correctly even when the fuses
located in the engine compartment
and instrument panel are not discon-
nected. In such case, the cause of
the problem may be disconnection of
the main fuse (BFT type), which is
located inside the positive battery
terminal (+) cap. Since the main fuse
is designed more intricately than
other parts, we recommend you visit
the nearest HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
After inspection always securely
install the battery cap. If it is not
securely latched, electrical failure may
occur from water contact.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
i
NOTICE
OAE076021
OAE076022
7-56
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
i
OAE076053L
OAE076025
7-57
7
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Module 5
MODULE
5
10A
Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio, Driver IMS Module,
A/T Shift Lever Indicator, A/C Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module,
Console Switch LH/RH, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Vess Unit,
Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module
Module 4
MODULE
4
10A
Lane Departure Warning Unit, Crash Pad Switch, AEB Unit,
Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH
Interior Lamp 10A
Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Luggage Lamp
Air bag 15A SRS Control Module
Ignition 1
IG1
25A PCB Block
Cluster
CLUSTER
10A Instrument Cluster
Module 3
MODULE
3
10A BCM, DCT Shift Lever, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module
Memory 2
MEMORY
2
7.5A Active Air Flap LH/RH
Module 8
MODULE
8
10A
Active Air Flap LH/RH, Electric Water Pump (Engine), VPD Sensor, BMS Control Module,
E/R Junction Block
Air bag Indicator
IND
7.5A A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster
Start 7.5A Burglar Alarm Relay, Transaxle Range Switch
7-58
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Module 2
MODULE
2
10A
E/R Junction Block, Wireless Charger Unit, BCM, USB Charging Connector, Smart Key
Control Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP
Button Start 3
3
7.5A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
Memory 1
MEMORY
1
10A
Wireless Charger Unit, Instrument Cluster, Driver Ims Module, Rain Sensor, BCM,
A/C Control Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Driver Door Module,
Passenger Door Module, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)
Multi Media
MULTI
MEDIA
10A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
Electric Water
Pump
EEWP
10A Electric Water Pump (HEV)
Electric
Power Steering 1
1
7.5A EPS Unit
Tailgate 10A Tail Gate Relay, Fuel Filler Switch, Fuel Filler Actuator
Button Start 1
1
15A Smart Key Control Module
Module 7
MODULE
7
7.5A
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module,
Rear Seat Warmer Module
Heated Steering 15A BCM
Sunroof 20A Sunroof Motor
Power Window
Right-hand
RH
25A
Power Window (RH) Relay, Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch
(LHD), Rear Power Window Switch (RH), Driver Safety Power Window Module (LHD),
Passenger Power Window Switch (RHD)
Instrument panel fuse panel
7-59
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Power Window
Left-hand
LH
25A
Power Window (LH) Relay, Power Window Main Switch,
Passenger Power Window Switch (RHD), Rear Power Window Switch (LH),
Driver Safety Power Window Module (RHD), Passenger Power Window Switch (LHD)
Button Start 2
2
7.5A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch
Brake Switch
BRAKE
SWITCH
7.5A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
Air conditioner 7.5A Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Electronic A/C Compressor, E/R Junction Block
Washer 15A Multifunction Switch
Seat Heater Rear
RR
25A Rear Seat Warmer Module
Battery
Management
System
BATTER
Y
MANAG-
EMENT
10A BMS Control Module
Power Seat Driver
DRV
30A Driver Seat Manual Switch
AMP
AMP
30A AMP
AMS
AMS
30A Battery Sensor
Module 1
MODULE
1
10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror
Door Lock 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)
Instrument panel fuse panel
7-60
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Wiper Front 2
FRT2
10A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)
Module 6
MODULE
6
7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
Seat Heater Front
FRT
25A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
Heated Mirror 10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
Rear Heated 25A Rear Defogger (+) (Upper)
Wiper Front 1
FRT1
30A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)
Instrument panel fuse panel
7-61
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
i
OAE076026
OAE076069L
7-62
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Multi Fuse
MAIN
150A Low Voltage DC-DC Converter, E/R Junction Block
5
60A PCB Block
2
60A IGPM
3
60A IGPM
4
50A IGPM
60A Engine Room Junction Block
1
50A Engine Room Junction Block
40A Engine Room Junction Block
IG1
40A
Without Smart Key : Ignition Switch
With Smart Key : E/R Junction Block
IG2
40A
Without Smart Key : Ignition Switch
With Smart Key : E/R Junction Block
1
80A EPS Unit
PTC
HEATER
1
50A Engine Room Junction Block
7-63
7
Maintenance
Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Multi Fuse
PTC
HEATER
2
50A Engine Room Junction Block
CLUTCH
ACTUATOR
40A Clutch Actuator
Fuse
DCT
3
15A TCM
HPCU
1
10A HPCU
EWP
10A Electric Water Pump (Engine)
1
40A IGPM
DCT
2
40A TCM
DCT
1
40A TCM
10A Engine Room Junction Block
1
ACTIVE
HYDRAULIC
BOSSTER
40A Multipurpose Check Connector, IBAU
2
ACTIVE
HYDRAULIC
BOSSTER
30A Multipurpose Check Connector, IBAU
POWER
OUTLET
1
40A Engine Room Junction Block
B/UP
LAMP
10A Audio, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror
Engine compartment fuse panel
7-64
Maintenance
Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Fuse
POWER
OUTLET
3
20A Cigarette Lighter
POWER
OUTLET
2
20A Power Outlet
2
15A IGPM, Rear Defogger (+) (Lower)
S2
10A Engine Room Junction Block, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Mass Air Flow Sensor
E1
20A ECM
S1
15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
IGN
COIL
20A Ignition Coil #1~#4
E2
15A ECM
10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
E3
10A ECM
HPCU
2
15A HPCU, Clutch Actuator (HEV)
3
ACTIVE
HYDRAULIC
BOSSTER
10A Multipurpose Check Connector, IBAU
DCT
4
15A DCT Shift Lever, TCM, Transaxle Range Switch
Engine compartment fuse panel
7-65
7
Maintenance
Type Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
Fuse
S3
10A
Fuel Pump Relay, Camshaft Position Sensor #1 (Intake), Camshaft Position Sensor #2
(Exhaust), Oil Control Valve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust)
BATTERY
C/FAN
15A Engine Room Junction Block
FUEL
PUMP
20A Fuel Pump Relay
20A Horn Relay
Engine compartment fuse panel
7-66
Maintenance
L
LIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb. This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
Information
After heavy driving, rain or washing,
the lamps could appear frosty. This
condition is caused by the temperature
difference between the lamp inside and
the outside temperature. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the light
bulb circuitry, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
• A normally functioning lamp may
flicker momentarily to stabilize the
vehicle’s electrical control system.
However, if the lamp goes out after
flickering momentarily, or contin-
ues to flicker, we recommend the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The position lamp may not turn on
when the position lamp switch is
turned on, but the position lamp and
headlamp switch may turn on when
the headlamp switch is turned on.
This may be caused by network fail-
ure or vehicle electrical control sys-
tem malfunction. If this occurs, we
recommend the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
i
• Prior to replacing a lamp,
depress the foot brake, move
the shift lever into P (Park),
apply the parking brake, place
the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position, and take
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle to avoid sudden
movement of the vehicle and
to prevent possible electric
shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be hot
and may burn your fingers.
WARNING
7-67
7
Maintenance
Headlamp, position lamp,
turn signal lamp bulb replace-
ment
Type A
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Position lamp
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
Information
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric. If you go abroad to a
country with opposite traffic direc-
tion, this asymmetric part will dazzle
oncoming car driver. To prevent daz-
zle, ECE regulation demand several
technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direc-
tion.
i
OAE076028
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
WARNING
OAE076052
7-68
Maintenance
Headlamp and position lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the bulb cover (1) by turn-
ing it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the bulb socket-con-
nector. (for low beam and high
beam)
5. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Connect the bulb socket-connec-
tor. (for low beam and high beam)
8. Install the bulb cover (1) by turning
it clockwise.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
i
OAE076030
High beam
Position lamp
Low beam
OAE076031
7-69
7
Maintenance
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Type B
(1) Headlamp (Low/High)
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Position lamp
Headlamp and position lamp
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
If your vehicle is equipped with High
Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps,
these headlamps contain mercury. So
if you need to have your vehicle dis-
posed, you should remove the HID
Headlamps before disposal. The
removed HID headlamps should be
recycled, re-used or disposed as haz-
ardous waste.
i
OAE076029
HID headlamp
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI Dealer.
WARNING
7-70
Maintenance
Information
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID lamps are estimated by the man-
ufacturer to last twice as long or
longer than halogen bulbs depending
on their frequency of use. They will
probably require replacement at some
point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling
the headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric. If you go abroad to a
country with opposite traffic direc-
tion, this asymmetric part will dazzle
oncoming car driver. To prevent daz-
zle, ECE regulation demand several
technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direc-
tion.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
i
i
i
OAE076032
7-71
7
Maintenance
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Headlamp aiming (For Europe)
Headlamp aiming
1. Inflate the tires to the specified
pressure and remove any loads
from the vehicle except the driver,
spare tire, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a
flat floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines
passing through respective head
lamp centers) and a horizontal line
(Horizontal line passing through
center of head lamps) on the
screen.
4. With the headlamp and battery in
normal condition, aim the head-
lamps so the brightest portion falls
on the horizontal and vertical
lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise. To aim the low beam
up or down, turn the driver clock-
wise or counterclockwise.
To aim the high beam up or down,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise.
• Type A
• Type B
• Type B
• Type A
OAE076056L/OAE076058L
■ Without headlight leveling device
OAE076057L/OAE076059L
■ With headlight leveling device
7-72
Maintenance
Unit: mm (in)
■ Type A
Aiming point
OAE076068L
<Ground height>
<Distance between lamps>
Vehicle condition H1 H2
W1 W2
Without driver
714
(28.11)
688
(27.08)
1,463
(57.59)
1,238
(48.74)
With driver
707
(27.83)
681
(26.81)
1,463
(57.59)
1,238
(48.74)
Vehicle condition H1 H2 W1 W2
Without driver
709
(27.91)
709
(27.91)
1,454
(57.24)
1,454
(57.24)
With driver
702
(27.63)
702
(27.63)
1,454
(57.24)
1,454
(57.24)
■ Type B
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
7-73
7
Maintenance
Headlamp low beam (LHD side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch to “0”.
:
&DUD[LV
9HUWLFDOOLQHRIOHIW
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
&XWRIIOLQH
9HUWLFDOOLQHRIULJKW
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
+RUL]RQWDOOLQHRI
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
*5281'
+
/RZEHDP
/RZEHDP
OAE076060L
■ Based on 10m screen
7-74
Maintenance
Headlamp low beam (RHD side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch to “0”.
:
&DUD[LV
9HUWLFDOOLQHRIOHIW
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
&XWRIIOLQH
9HUWLFDOOLQHRIULJKW
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
+RUL]RQWDOOLQHRI
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
*5281'
+
/RZEHDP
/RZEHDP
OAE076061L
■ Based on 10m screen
7-75
7
Maintenance
Daytime running lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
Type A
1. Remove the lamp assembly from
the vehicle by prying the lens and
pulling the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical con-
nector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens
parts by turning the socket coun-
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots on the
lens part.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Reassemble the socket and the
lens part.
7. Connect the bulb electrical con-
nector.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OAE076049
OAE076033
7-76
Maintenance
Type B
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
Type A
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Tail lamp
(4) Backup lamp
Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Open the lamp assembly retaining
screw covers.
4. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw-
driver.
OAE076034
OAE076035
OAE076037
7-77
7
Maintenance
5. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
6. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to
the body of the vehicle.
OAE076038 OAE076039
Stop/tail lamp
Turn signal lamp
7-78
Maintenance
Tail lamp and backup lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
Type B
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Tail lamp
(4) Backup lamp
Stop/Tail lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAE076036
OAE076041 OAE076042
Backup lamp
7-79
7
Maintenance
Turn signal lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Open the lamp assembly retaining
screw covers.
4. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw-
driver.
5. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
6. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on the
assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
OAE076040OAE076038OAE076037
7-80
Maintenance
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn
the socket clockwise.
10. Reinstall the lamp assembly to
the body of the vehicle
Backup lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Reinstall the service cover.
OAE076042
Backup lamp
OAE076041
7-81
7
Maintenance
Rear fog lamp (if equipped)
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
High mounted stop lamp
If the high mounted stop lamp does not
operate, we recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
License plate light bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from the
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order.
Interior light bulb replacement
Map lamp and room lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend that you have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OAE076044
OAEE076026
OAEE076027
■ Map lamp (LED type)
■ Room lamp (LED type)
OAE076043
7-82
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Use care not to dirty or damage
lenses, lens tabs, and plastic
housings.
NOTICE
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Tailgate room lamp
OAE076048
OAE076047
■ Map lamp (Bulb type)
OAE076045
OAE076046
■ Room lamp (Bulb type)
Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and tailgate room lamp
7-83
7
Maintenance
AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, should be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
• Do not use strong soap, chem-
ical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts, do not clean with
chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
CAUTION
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water before getting on the
road. If braking performance is
impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while main-
taining a slow forward speed.
WARNING
7-84
Maintenance
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier
between your paint and contaminate.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
OAE076051
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
7-85
7
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion mate-
rials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
NOTICE
7-86
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with
a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars
of the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner’s
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
• Do not use abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent,
or wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neu-
tral detergent, and rinse thor-
oughly with water. Also, clean
the wheels after driving on
salted roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents.
CAUTION
7-87
7
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because
it is slow to dry and holds moisture in
contact with the vehicle. Although the
mud appears to be dry, it can still
retain the moisture and promote cor-
rosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
7-88
Maintenance
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, pay particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don’t park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your vehicle in the garage or drive it
into the garage when it is still wet or
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even
a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated
so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings are highly corrosive
and may damage painted surfaces in
just a few hours. Always remove bird
droppings as soon as possible.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-
tacting the interior parts because
they may cause damage or discol-
oration. If they do contact the interior
parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
• When cleaning leather prod-
ucts (steering wheel, seats
etc.), use neutral detergents
or low alcohol content solu-
tions. If you use high alcohol
content solutions or acid/
alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the
surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION
7-89
7
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with
a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do
not receive immediate attention, the
fabric can be stained and its color can
be affected. Also, its fire-resistant prop-
erties can be reduced if the material is
not properly maintained.
Cleaning the seat belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
the seat belt.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures may
affect the fabric’s appearance
and fire-resistant properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
7-90
Maintenance
E
EMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
For the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from
misfiring during dynamome-
ter testing, turn the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) sys-
tem off by pressing the ESC
switch (ESC OFF light illumi-
nated).
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC sys-
tem back on by pressing the
ESC switch again.
CAUTION
7-91
7
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
When the engine starts or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission system.
Engine exhaust (carbon monox-
ide) precautions
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind in
your vehicle, drive with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING
7-92
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle, take
the following precautions:
The exhaust system and cat-
alytic converter are very hot
during and immediately after
the engine has been running. To
avoid SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust
system and catalytic convert-
er or you may get burned.
Also, Do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle, and do not coat
the vehicle for corrosion con-
trol. It may present a fire risk
under certain conditions.
WARNING
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL
for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle
when there are signs of
engine malfunction, such as
misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse
are coasting with the hybrid
system off and descending
steep grades in gear with the
hybrid system off.
• Do not operate the engine at
high idle speed for extended
periods (5 minutes or more).
(Continued)
CAUTION
7-93
7
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Do not modify or tamper with
any part of the engine or
emission control system. All
inspections and adjustments
must be made by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extreme-
ly low fuel level.
Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic con-
verter.
8
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Engine......................................................................8-2
Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3
Tires and wheels....................................................8-4
Tire load and speed capacity...............................8-5
Air conditioning system ........................................8-5
Volume and weight ................................................8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-7
Vehicle identification number (VIN)....................8-8
Vehicle certification label.....................................8-8
Tire specification and pressure label .................8-9
Engine number .......................................................8-9
Air conditioner compressor label ........................8-9
Declaration of conformity ..................................8-10
8-2
Specifications & Consumer information
D
DIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS
E
ENNGGIINNEE
Engine Displacement cc (cu. in) Bore x Stroke mm (in.) Firing order No. of cylinders
Kappa 1.6 GDI
1580 (96.4) 72 X 97 (2.8 X 3.8) 1-3-4-2 In-line 4 cylinder
Items mm (in)
Overall length 4,470 (175.9)
Overall width 1,820 (71.6)
Overall height
For Europe & Australia 1,450 (57.1)
Except Europe 1,460 (57.4)
Front tread
195/65 R15 1,563 (61.5)
225/45 R17 1,549 (61.0)
Rear tread
195/65 R15 1,577 (62.0)
225/45 R17 1,563 (61.5)
Wheelbase 2,700 (106.3)
8-3
8
Specifications & Consumer information
BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE
Light bulb Bulb type Wattage
Front
Type A
Headlamp
Low H7LL 60
High 9005HL+ 55
Position lamp W5W 5
Turn signal lamp PY21W 21
Type B
Headlamp Low/High D8S 25
Position lamp LED LED
Turn signal lamp PY21W 21
Daytime running light (DRL) LED LED
Side repeater lamp
Outside mirror LED LED
Vehicle side W5W 5
Rear
Type A
Tail/Stop lamp P21/W 21
Turn signal lamp PY21/5W 21/5
Tail lamp W5W 5
Backup lamp W16W 16
Type B
Tail/Stop lamp LED LED
Turn signal lamp PY21W 21
Tail lamp LED LED
Backup lamp W16W 16
Fog lamp LED LED
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamp W5W 5
Interior
Map lamp
Type A W10W 10
Type B LED LED
Room lamp
Type A FESTOON 8
Type B LED LED
Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5
Luggage room lamp FESTOON 5
8-4
Specifications & Consumer information
T
TIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Item Tire size
Wheel
size
Inflation pressure, bar (kPa, psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque
kgf·m (lbf·ft, N•m)
Normal load *
1
Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
195/65 R15 6.0J X 15
2.5 (250, 36) 2.5 (250, 36) 2.5 (250, 36) 2.5 (250, 36)
11~13
(79~94, 107~127)
225/45 R17 7.0J X 17
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60) 4.2 (420, 60)
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
CAUTION
*
1
: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
• It is permissible to add 20 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are
expected soon.Tires typically lose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature
variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan
to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level
(Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km (+2.4 psi/1 mile).
NOTICE
8-5
8
Specifications & Consumer information
TTIIRREE LLOOAADD AANNDD SSPPEEEEDD CCAAPPAACCIITTYY
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX *
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
Min : Behind rear seat to roof.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tire
195/65 R15 6.0J X 15 91 615 H 210
225/45 R17 7.0J X 17 91 615 W 270
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 95 690 M 130
VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT
Gross vehicle weight kg (lbs.)
Luggage volume l (cu ft)
Min. Max.
1,870 (4,122) 550 (19.4) 1,505 (53.1)
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant g (oz.) 600±25 (21.16±0.88)
R-1234yf (For Europe)
R-134a (Except Europe)
Compressor lubricant g (oz.) 130±10 (4.58±0.35) POE
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
8-6
Specifications & Consumer information
R
REECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
Recommends
(drain and refill)
3.8 l
(4.0 US qt.)
5W-30
ACEA A5/B5*
3
Dual clutch transmission fluid
1.6 ~ 1.7 l
(1.69 ~ 1.79 US qt.)
SAE 70W, API GL-4
HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
Engine clutch actuator fluid
100 ± 20 cc
(0.105 ± 0.021 US qt.)
DOT 3
Engine coolant
6.7 l (7.07 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)
Inverter coolant
3.2 l (3.38 US qt.)
Brake/fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.74~0.85 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
45 l (47.5 US qt.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in the Introduction chapter.
*
1
: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
: If the ACEA A5/B5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use ACEA A3/B3, A3/B4.
8-7
8
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
CAUTION
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity
engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,
however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication
in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
20W-50
15W-40
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
8-8
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s (or front pas-
senger’s) side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN)) VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN
L
LAABBEELL
OAE086004L
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OAE086001
■ Frame number
OAE086002
8-9
8
Specifications & Consumer information
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, suppli-
er part number, production number,
refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD
P
PRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL
E
ENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR
OHC081001
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNEERR
C
COOMMPPRREESSSSOORR LLAABBEELL
OAE086003
OAE086002L
OAE086002R
■ Right-hand drive
■ Left-hand drive
8-10
Specifications & Consumer information
The radio frequency components of
the vehicle comply with requirements
and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1995/5/EC.
Further information including the
manufacturer's declaration of con-
formity is available on HYUNDAI
web site as follows:
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
CE0678
DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF
C
COONNFFOORRMMIITTYY
■ Example
A
Appendix
I
Appendix
A
Шофиране през зимата (Bulgarian)..................9-2
Téli vezetés (Hungarian) .....................................9-6
Vetrarakstur (Icelandic).....................................9-10
Jazda zimą (Polish)...........................................9-14
Тежките зимни атмосферни условия
могат да предизвикат по-голямо
износване и други проблеми. За да
сведете до минимум проблемите,
свързани с шофирането през
зимата, следвайте препоръките по-
долу:
Сняг или поледица
За да карате своето превозно
средство при дълбока снежна
покривка може да се наложи да
използвате зимни гуми или да
поставите вериги върху тях. Ако са
необ ходими зимни гуми, трябва
да изберете гуми със същия
размер и вид като тези на
оригиналните гуми.
В противен случай това може да
се отрази неблагоприятно на
безопасността и експлоатацията
на Вашия автомобил. Освен това
карането с висока скорост,
бързото ускорение, внезапното
натискане на спирачки и резките
завои крият сериозни опасности.
При забавяне на скоростта,
използвайте доколкото е
възможно спирачките на дви
гателя. Внезапното натискане на
спирачки на заснежена или
заледена настилка може да
предизвика занасяне. Трябва да
под държате достатъчна
дистанция между автомобила,
който се движи пред Вас, и Вашия
автомобил.
Освен това натискайте спирачката
леко. Следва да се отбележи че
инсталирането на веригите върху
гума та ще позволи прилагането
на по-голяма движеща сила, но
няма да предотврати занасянето
встрани.
Веригите за гуми не са
позволени във всички държави.
Проверете норма тивната
уредба в своята страна преди
да поставите вериги за гуми.
К СВЕДЕНИЮ
ШОФИРАНЕ ПРЕЗ ЗИМАТА (BULGARIAN)
9-2
Appendix
Г уми за сняг
Ако поставите гуми за сняг на своя
авто- мобил се уверете, че това са
радиалнигуми със същия размер и
товарен индекс като тези на
оригиналните гуми. Поставете гуми
за сняг на всичките четири колела,
за да балансирате експлоатацията
на своя автомобил във всякакви
атмос- ферни условия. Имайте
предвид, че тягата на гумите за сняг
върху суха настилка не може да
бъде толкова голяма колкото тази
на оригиналните гуми. Следва да
карате внимателно, дори когато
пътищата са почистени.
Консултирайте се с доставчика на
гуми за максималната
препоръчителна скорост.
Не монтирайте гуми с шипове,
преди да сте проверили
местните, национални и общински
разпоредби за възможни огра-
ничения в тяхната употреба.
Вериги за гуми
Тъй като страниците на
радиалните гуми са по-тънки, те
могат да се повредят, ако върху
тях се монтират някои видове
вери- ги за сняг. Ето защо се
препоръчва изпол- зването на
гуми за сняг, а не на вериги за сняг.
Не поставяйте вериги върху
автомо- били, чиито колела са с
алуминиеви джан- ти; веригите за
сняг могат да повредят колелата.
Ако трябва да се използват вериги
за сняг, използвайте телени вериги
с дебелина от поне 12 мм.
9-3
A
Appendix
Размер на гумите за сняг
Г умите за сняг следва да са
равностойни по размер и тип на
тези на стандартните гуми на
автомобила. В противен случай
това може да се отрази
неблагоприятно на безопасността
и експлоатацията на Вашия
автомобил.
ОСТОРОЖНО
OAE056091
Повредата на Вашия автомобил
вследствие на непра- вилната
употреба на вериги за сняг не е в
обхвата на гаранцията на
производителя на Вашия
автомобил.
Поставяйте веригите винаги по
две, на предните гуми. Обърнете
внимание, че поставянето на
вериги на гумите на автомобила
осигурява по-добра задвижваща
сила, но не предпазва от
странични поднасяния.
9-4
Appendix
•
Уверете се, че размерът и
видът на веригите са
правилните за Вашите гуми.
Неправилните вериги за сняг
могат да повредят
каросерията и окачването на
автомобила и този тип повреда
може да не е в обхвата на
производствената гаранция за
Вашия автомобил. Също така
куките за свързване на
веригите за сняг могат да се
повредят от намиращите се в
контакт с тях автомобилни
части, като това може да
доведе до разхлабването им.
Уверете се, че веригите за сняг
са от клас S според
класификацията на
Дружеството на автомобилните
инженери (SAE).
(продолжение)
(продолжение)
• Винаги проверявайте дали
вериги- те са били
поставени правилно след
като изминете около 0,5 до 1
км, за да се уверите в
безопасното им поставяне.
Затегнете веригите или ги
поставете отново, ако са се
разхлабили.
ВНИМАНИЕ
Монтиране на вериги
Когато инсталирате веригите,
следвайте инструкциите на
производителя и ги затег- нете
максимално. Карайте бавно с
инста- лирани вериги. Ако чуете, че
веригите са навлезли в контакт с
каросерията или шасито, спрете и
ги затегнете. Ако те все още са в
контакт, намалете скоростта до
преустановяване на контакта.
Свалете веригите веднага, щом
започнете да кара- те по
почистените пътища.
9-5
A
Appendix
Поставяне на вериги
Когато поставите вериги за
сняг , пар- кирайте автомобила
на равно място далеч от
пътното движение. Включете
аварийните светлини и
поставете светлоотразителния
три- ъгълник зад автомобила,
ако разпо- лагате с такъв.
Винаги паркирайте автомобила
в паркинг, дръпнете ръч-ната
спирачка и изключете двигате-
ля преди да поставите веригите
за сняг.
ОСТОРОЖНО
Вериги за гуми
• Използването на вериги може
да се отрази неблагоприятно
на работата на Вашия
автомобил.
• Не надвишавайте пределната
ско- рост, препоръчана от
производителя, или
скоростта от 30 км/ч, което е
по- ниско.
• Карайте внимателно и
избягвайте неравности,
дупки, резки завои и други
опасности на пътя, които
могат да накарат автомобила
да подскача.
• Избягвайте резките завои или
изпол- зването на спирачки,
ако колелата са блокирани.
ОСТОРОЖНО
•
Веригите с грешен размер
или тези, които са
неправилно инсталирани,
могат да повредят
спирачните накладки,
окачването, каросерията и
колелата.
•
Спрете и затегнете веригите
повтор- но винаги, щом ги
чуете да удрят автомобила.
ВНИМАНИЕ
Télen a nehéz időjárási feltételek
nagyobb elhasználódást és más
problémákat eredményezhetnek. A
téli vezetés problémáinak
csökkentése érdekében célszerű
követnie a következő javaslatokat:
Havas vagy jeges útviszonyok
Mély hóban közlekedéshez szükség
lehet téli gumiabroncsok használatára
vagy kerekeire hólánc felszerelésére.
Ha téli gumiabroncsokra van
szüksége, a gyárilag felszerelttel
megegyező méretű és típusú
gumiabroncsot kell választani. Ennek
figyelmen kívül hagyása hátrányosan
befolyásolja gépkocsija biztonságát és
vezethetőségét. Ezen túlmenően a
nagy sebességű haladás, a hirtelen
gyorsítás, a hirtelen fékezés és a
gyors kanyarvétel nagyon veszélyes
gyakorlat.
Lassításkor a lehető legjobban
használja ki motorja fékhatását.
Havas vagy jeges úton a hirtelen
fékezés megcsúszást okozhat.
Elegendően nagy követési
távolságot kell tartania saját
gépkocsija és az Ön előtt haladó
jármű között. Tehát óvatosan
fékezzen. Jegyezze meg, hogy
hólánc használatakor megnő a
hajtóerő, de nem segít az oldalra
kicsúszás elkerülésében.
A hólánc nem legális minden
országban. Ellenőrizze az Ön
országának törvényeit, mielőtt
felszereli a hóláncot.
MEGJEGYZÉS
TTÉÉLLII VVEEZZEETTÉÉSS ((HHUUNNGGAARRIIAANN))
9-6
Appendix
Téli gumiabroncs
Ha téli gumiabroncsot akar használni,
először győződjön meg arról, hogy
ezek megfelelő méretű és
terhelhetőségű radiál abroncsok.
Kifejezetten javasoljuk, hogy mind a
négy kerékre szereltessen téli
gumiabroncsot, hogy biztosítsa
gépkocsija jó vezethetőségét. Ne
feledje, hogy a téli gumiabroncsok
tapadása száraz úton nem olyan jó,
mint a gépkocsira eredetileg felszerelt
gumiabroncsoké. Még tiszta úton is
óvatosan kell vezetnie.Tájékozódjon a
gumiszerelőnél a megengedett
legnagyobb sebességgel
kapcsolatban.
Ne szereltessen fel szöges
gumiabroncsot, mielőtt tájékozódna
a használatukra, illetve esetleges
tiltásukra vonatkozó helyi előírásokról.
Hólánc
Mivel a radiál gumiabroncsok oldalfala
vékonyabb, megsérülhetnek bizonyos
fajtájú hólánc felszerelésétől. Ezért
inkább javasoljuk a téli gumiabroncsok
használatát, mint a hólánc
használatát. Ne szereljen fel hóláncot
alumínium keréktárcsás kerékre, mivel
a hólánc sérüléseket okozhat a
keréktárcsán. Ha mégis hóláncot
kellene használnia, használjon 12
mm-es átmérőnél kisebb, kábeltípusú
hóláncot. Gépkocsijának a hólánc
helytelen használatából eredő káraira
nem vonatkozik a garancia.
9-7
A
Appendix
A téli gumiabroncsok mérete
A téli gumiabroncsnak mind
méretében, mind szerkezetében
meg kell egyeznie az eredeti
nyárival. Ellenkező esetben
gépkocsija biztonsága és
vezethetősége kedvezőtlenül
változhat.
VIGYÁZAT!
OAE056091
A hóláncot mindig párban szerelje fel
az első kerekekre. Fontos
megjegyezni, hogy a kerekekre
felszerelt hólánc nagyobb tapadóerőt
biztosít, azonban nem akadályozza
meg a kicsúszást oldalra.
A hуlбnc felszerelйse
A hólánc felszerelésekor figyelmesen
kövesse gyártójának utasításait, és a
lehető legfeszesebbre húzza meg a
láncot. A felszerelt hólánccal lassan
közlekedjen. Ha a lánc hozzáverődik
a karosszériához vagy az alvázhoz,
álljon meg és feszítsen rajta. Ha még
mindig hozzáér, lassítson le annyira,
hogy megszűnjön a kontaktus.
Haladéktalanul távolítsa el a
láncokat, amint tiszta útra ér.
9-8
Appendix
• Ügyeljen arra, hogy a hólánc a
gumiabroncsaihoz megfelelő
méretű és típusú legyen. A
nem megfelelő méretű hólánc
megrongálhatja gépkocsija
karosszériáját és
felfüggesztéseit, és erre nem
vonatkozik a gépkocsi
garanciája. Ezenkívül a
hólánc összekötő kapcsai
megsérülhetnek a
karosszériához ütődéstől,
amitől a hólánc meglazulhat,
és leeshet a kerékről.
Kizárólag az SAE szabvány
szerinti „S” osztályú hóláncot
használjon.
• 0,5 - 1km megtétele után
ellenőrizze megfelelő
elhelyezkedésüket a
biztonságos felszerelésük
érdekében. Ha meglazultak,
húzza meg újra, vagy szerelje
fel ismét a hóláncokat.
FIGYELEM!
Hólánc felszerelése
Forgalomtól távol eső sík
felületen álljon félre. Kapcsolja
be a vészvillogót és tegyen ki
elakadásjelző háromszöget a
gépkocsi mögé. A hólánc
felszerelése előtt mindig
kapcsolja P állásba a
sebességváltó választókarját,
működtesse a rögzítőféket, majd
állítsa le a motort.
VIGYÁZAT!
9-9
A
Appendix
Hólánc
• A hólánc használata jelentősen
korlátozza a gépkocsi
kezelhetőségét.
• Ne lépje túl a 30 km/h
sebességet, vagy a hólánc
gyártója által meghatározott
maximális sebességet. Mindig a
kettő közül alacsonyabb értéket
tartsa be.
• Vezessen óvatosan, kerülje a
bukkanókat, lyukakat, éles
kanyarokat és az úton előforduló
egyéb veszélyforrásokat, melyek
a gépkocsi erős berugózását
okozzák.
• Tartózkodjon az éles
kanyarvételtől és a blokkoló
kerekekkel történő fékezéstől.
VIGYÁZAT!
• A nem megfelelő méretű vagy
rosszul felszerelt hólánc
megrongálhatja gépkocsija
féktömlőit, felfüggesztéseit,
karosszériáját és a kerekeit.
• Álljon meg és húzza
feszesebbre a hóláncokat, ha
beleütnek a gépkocsi
valamelyik alkatrészébe.
FIGYELEM!
Akstur í þungri færð og vetrarveðri
leiðir til aukins slits á ökutækinu og
skapar ýmis vandamál. Hægt er að
draga úr erfiðleikum sem fylgja
vetrarakstri ef farið er að þessum
ráðleggingum:
Akstur í snjó eða hálku
Við akstur í djúpum snjó kann að vera
nauðsynlegt að nota vetrarhjólbarða
eða setja keðjur á hjólbarðana.
Reynist nauðsynlegt að nota
vetrarhjólbarða þarf að velja hjólbarða
af sömu stærð og gerð og venjulegu
hjólbarðarnir. Sé það ekki gert getur
það dregið úr öryggi og skert
aksturseiginleika ökutækisins.
Hraðakstur, skyndileg hröðun,
nauðhemlun og krappar beygjur geta
enn fremur falið í sér mikla hættu.
Þegar dregið er úr hraða er ráðlegt
að beita vélarhemlun sem kostur er.
Við nauðhemlun á snævi þöktum
eða hálum vegum getur ökutækið
hæglega runnið til. Nauðsynlegt er
að halda hæfilegri fjarlægð á milli
þíns ökutækis og ökutækisins fyrir
framan. Alltaf ætti að beita hemlinum
mjúklega. Hafa ber í huga að ef
keðjur eru settar á hjólbarða fæst
aukinn drifkraftur en það hindrar þó
ekki að ökutækið renni til hliðanna.
Notkun snjókeðja er ólögleg í
sumum ríkjum. Kynnið ykkur
gildandi landslög áður en keðjur
eru settar upp.
ATHUGIÐ
VVEETTRRAARRAAKKSSTTUURR ((IICCEELLAANNDDIICC))
9-10
Appendix
Vetrarhjólbarðar
Ef vetrarhjólbarðar eru settir á
ökutækið þarf að gæta þess að nota
þverofna hjól- barða af sömu stærð og
ásþunga og upprunalegu
hjólbarðarnir. Setjið vetrarhjólbarða á
öll fjögur hjólin til að tryggja örugga
stýringu ökutækisins við öll
veðurskilyrði. Hafið í huga að á auðum
vegi kunna vetrarhjólbarðar að hafa
minna grip en hjólbarðarnir sem fylgdu
ökutækinu. Því þarf að aka af gætni,
jafnvel á auðum vegum. Ráðfærið
ykkur við söluaðila hjólbarðanna um
ráðlagðan hámarkshraða.
Á
ður en negldir hjólbarðar eru settir
upp er rétt að kynna sér reglugerðir um
notkun slíkra hjólbarða í viðkomandi
landi, fylki eða sveitarfélagi.
Keðjur á hjólbarða
Hliðar þverofinna hjólbarða eru þynnri
en á öðrum hjólbörðum og sumar gerðir
snjókeðja geta því valdið skemmdum á
þeim. Því er ráðlegt að nota
vetrarhjólbarða fremur en keðjur, ef
þess er kostur.
Setjið aldrei keðjur á hjólbarða
ökutækja sem búin eru álfelgum þar
sem keðjurnar geta valdið skemmdum
á felgunum. Ef óhjákvæmilegt reynist
að nota keðjur skal nota vírkeðjur sem
eru innan við 12 mm á þykkt.
Ábyrgðartrygging söluaðila ökutækisins
tekur ekki til skemmda sem orsakast af
rangri notkun snjókeðja.
9-11
A
Appendix
Stærðir vetrarhjólbarða
Vetrarhjólbarðar ættu að vera af
sömu stærð og gerð og
hjólbarðarnir sem fylgdu
ökutækinu.
Misræmi á því getur dregið úr
öryggi og skert aksturseiginleika
ökutækisins.
VIÐVÖRUN
OAE056091
9-12
Appendix
Aðeins skal setja keðjur á í pörum og
aðeins á framhjólbarðana. Hafa ber í
huga að ef keðjur eru settar á
hjólbarða fæst aukinn drifkraftur. Það
hindrar þó ekki að ökutækið renni til
hliðanna.
Uppsetning б keрjum
Þegar keðjur eru settar á skal fylgja
leiðbeiningum framleiðanda og herða
keðjurnar eins mikið og unnt er. Þegar
keðjur hafa verið settar á skal aka
hægt. Ef hljóð heyrist sem bendir til að
keðjurnar séu í snertingu við
yfirbyggingu eða undirvagn er rétt að
nema staðar og herða keðjurnar. Ef
snerting virðist enn eiga sér stað skal
hægja aksturinn þar til hljóðið þagnar.
Takið keðjurnar niður um leið og
komið er á rudda og snjólausa vegi.
• Gætið þess að snjókeðjurnar
séu af þeirri stærð og gerð
sem hæfir hjólbörðunum.
Notkun snjókeðja af rangri
gerð getur valdið skemmdum
á yfirbyggingu og fjöðrun
ökutækisins og kann að falla
utan ábyrgðartryggingar
söluaðila ökutækisins. Þá
geta festikrókar keðjanna
skemmst vegan núnings við
íhluti ökutækisins og
snjókeðjurnar losnað af
hjólbarðanum. Gætið þess að
snjókeðjurnar séu með SAE-
vottun í S-flokki.
• Eftir um það bil 0,5-1 km
akstur skal ævinlega skoða
keðjurnar aftur til að tryggja
að þær hafi verið settar upp á
réttan og öruggan hátt. Herðið
keðjurnar eða setjið þær aftur
á ef þær hafa losnað.
VARÚÐ
9-13
A
Appendix
Uppsetning á keðjum
Þegar snjókeðjur eru settar upp
skal leggja ökutækinu á sléttum
fleti fjarri umferð. Kveikið á
viðvörunarljósum ökutækisins
og setjið þríhyrningslaga
viðvörunarskilti upp fyrir aftan
ökutækið, ef það er tiltækt.
Hafið ökutækið ævinlega í
stöðuhemli og drepið á vélinni
áður en snjókeðjur eru settar
upp.
VIÐVÖRUN
Keðjur á hjólbarða
• Notkun keðja getur skert
aksturs- eiginleika ökutækisins.
• Akið ekki hraðar en 30 km/klst.
eða samkvæmt ráðlögðum
hámarkshraða framleiðanda
keðjanna, hvort sem reynist
lægra.
• Akið gætilega og sneiðið hjá
þústum, holum, kröppum
beygjum og öðrum hættum á
veginum, sem gætu valdið
hristingi ökutækisins.
• Forðist krappar beygjur eða
læsta hemlun.
VIÐVÖRUN
• Séu snjókeðjur af rangri stærð
eða rangt upp settar geta þær
valdið skemmdum á hemlalögn,
fjöðrun, yfirbyggingu og hjólum
ökutækisins.
• Hvenær sem hljóð bendir til
þess að keðjurnar sláist við
ökutækið skal stöðva akstur
og herða keðjurnar.
VARÚÐ
JAZDA ZIMĄ (POLISH)
9-14
Appendix
Surowe warunki pogodowe zimą
powodują większe zużycie pojazdu i
inne problemy. Aby zminimalizować
problemy związane z jazdą w zimie,
postępuj zgodnie z poniższymi
sugestiami:
Jazda w warunkach
śniegowych i przy oblodzeniu
Aby prowadzić pojazd w głębokim
śniegu, może okazać się niezbędne
użycie opon zimowych lub
zainstalowanie łańcuchów
śniegowych. Jeśli potrzebne okażą
się opony zimowe, konieczne jest
wybranie opon o rozmiarze i typie
odpowiadających oponom, w jakie
pojazd był pierwotnie wyposażony.
Jeśli założone zostaną
nieodpowiednie opony, będzie to
miało negatywny wpływ na
bezpieczeństwo i prowadzenie
pojazdu. Ponadto jazda z nadmierną
prędkością, gwałtowne
przyspieszanie, nagłe hamowanie i
ostre skręty będą stanowiły
potencjalnie bardzo duże
niebezpieczeństwo.
Podczas zwalniania należy w pełni
wykorzystać hamowanie silnikiem.
Nagłe hamowanie na zaśnieżonej
lub oblodzonej drodze może
spowodować poślizg pojazdu.
Należy utrzymywać odpowiedni
odstęp od pojazdu jadącego z
przodu. Hamulców należy używać
ostrożnie. Należy pamiętać, że
założenie łańcuchów śniegowych
zapewni większą siłę napędową, ale
nie zapobiegnie ślizganiu się na
boki.
Stosowanie łańcuchów śniegowych
nie jest zgodne z prawem we
wszystkich krajach. Przed założeniem
łańcuchów śniegowych należy
sprawdzić przepisy danego kraju.
UWAGA
Opony zimowe
Kiedy zakładane są opony zimowe,
należy upewnić się, że są to opony
radialne o takim samym rozmiarze i
zakresie obciążeń co pierwotne
opony pojazdu. Opony zimowe należy
zakładać na wszystkie cztery koła
pojazdu, by we wszystkich
warunkach pogodowych pojazd
pozwalał się prowadzić równomiernie.
Należy pamiętać, że przyczepność
zapewniana przez opony zimowe na
suchej drodze może nie być równie
wysoka jak przyczepność
pierwotnych opon pojazdu. Pojazd
należy prowadzić ostrożnie nawet
wtedy, gdy drogi są oczyszczone. Aby
poznać informacje na temat
zalecanych ograniczeń prędkości dla
danych opon, należy skontaktować
się ze sprzedawcą opon.
Opon okolcowanych nie należy
zakładać bez uprzedniego
sprawdzenia w przepisach lokalnych,
stanowych i miejskich, czy na ich
użycie nie są nałożone ograniczenia.
Łańcuchy śniegowe
(przeciwpoślizgowe)
Ponieważ ścianki boczne opon
radialnych są cieńsze, założenie
niektórych rodzajów łańcuchów
śniegowych może spowodować ich
uszkodzenie. Z tego względu zaleca
się korzystanie z opon zimowych
zamiast łańcuchów śniegowych.
Łańcuchów śniegowych nie należy
zakładać w pojazdach, które są
wyposażone w felgi aluminiowe,
ponieważ mogą one powodować
uszkodzenia felg. Jeśli użycie
łańcuchów śniegowych jest niezbędne,
należy zastosować łańcuchy drutowe o
grubości poniżej 12 mm.
9-15
A
Appendix
Rozmiar opon zimowych
Opony zimowe powinny mieć
rozmiar i typ odpowiadający
standardowym oponom pojazdu.
Jeśli tak nie jest, może to mieć
negatywny wpływ na
bezpieczeństwo i prowadzenie
pojazdu.
OSTRZEŻENIE
OAE056091
Uszkodzenia pojazdu spowodowane
użyciem niewłaściwych łańcuchów
śniegowych nie jest objęte gwarancją
producenta pojazdu.
Łańcuchy na opony należy zakładać
jedynie parami i na przednich
oponach. Należy pamiętać, że
założenie łańcuchów na oponach
zwiększy siłę napędową, ale nie
zapobiegnie poślizgowi bocznemu.
Zakіadanie іaсcuchуw њniegowych
Zakładając łańcuchy śniegowe należy
postępować zgodnie z instrukcjami
podanymi przez producenta.
Łańcuchy należy założyć tak ciasno,
jak to tylko możliwe. Kiedy łańcuchy są
już założone, pojazd należy prowadzić
powoli. Jeśli dadzą się słyszeć dźwięki
świadczące o tym, że łańcuchy stykają
się z nadwoziem lub podwoziem,
należy zatrzymać samochód i
zacisnąć je. Jeśli łańcuchy wciąż
stykają się z elementami pojazdu,
należy zmniejszać prędkość, aż
łańcuchy przestaną uderzać w
samochód. Łańcuchy należy zdjąć jak
tylko rozpocznie się jazdę po
oczyszczonej drodze.
9-16
Appendix
•
Należy upewnić się, że
łańcuchy śniegowe mają
odpowiedni rozmiar i typ dla
opon pojazdu. Zastosowanie
niewłaściwych łańcuchów
śniegowych może spowodować
uszkodzenie nadwozia oraz
zawieszenia, a zniszczenia
powstałe w ten sposób mogą
nie być objęte gwarancją
producenta pojazdu.
(Ciąg dalszy)
(Ciąg dalszy)
Ponadto, haczyki łączące
łańcuchów śniegowych mogą
zostać zniszczone na skutek
stykania się z elementami
samochodu, co może
spowodować zsunięcie się
łańcuchów z opon. Należy
upewnić się, że łańcuchy
śniegowe są klasy “S” SAE i
posiadają certyfikat.
• Po przejechaniu ok. 0,5 do 1
km (0,3 do 0,6 mil), dla
zachowania bezpieczeństwa,
należy zawsze sprawdzić, czy
łańcuchy śniegowe zostały
poprawnie założone. Jeśli
łańcuchy poluzowały się,
należy je zacisnąć lub założyć
ponownie.
OSTROŻNIE
9-17
A
Appendix
Zakładanie łańcuchów
śniegowych
Aby założyć łańcuchy śniegowe,
należy zatrzymać pojazd na
płaskim podłożu, z dala od ruchu
drogowego. Włączyć światła
awaryjne pojazdu i umieścić za
nim trójkąt ostrzegawczy, jeśli
jest on dostępny. Zanim
rozpocznie się instalowanie
łańcuchów śniegowych dźwignię
zmiany biegów należy zawsze
umieścić w położeniu P (Postój),
zaciągnąć hamulec postojowy i
wyłączyć silnik.
OSTRZEŻENIE
Łańcuchy śniegowe
• Użycie łańcuchów śniegowych
może mieć negatywny wpływ
na prowadzenie pojazdu.
• Pojazdu nie należy prowadzić
szybciej niż 30 km/h (20 mil/h)
lub z prędkością większą, niż
zalecana przez producenta,
którakolwiek z tych wartości
okaże się mniejsza.
• Pojazd należy prowadzić
ostrożnie i unikać wybojów,
dziur, ostrych skrętów i innych
zagrożeń drogowych, które
mogą powodować
podskakiwanie pojazdu.
• Należy unikać ostrych
zakrętów lub hamowania z
zablokowanymi kołami.
OSTRZEŻENIE
• Łańcuchy o niewłaściwym
rozmiarze lub niepoprawnie
założone mogą uszkodzić
linki hamulcowe pojazdu,
zawieszenie, nadwozie oraz
koła.
• Za każdym razem, kiedy da się
usłyszeć, że łańcuchy
uderzają w samochód, należy
zatrzymać się i zacisnąć je.
OSTROŻNIE
I
Index
I
I-2
Air bag warning labels .................................................2-72
Air bags.........................................................................2-51
Additional safety precautions ....................................2-71
Air bag collision sensors ...........................................2-65
Air bag inflation conditions.......................................2-67
Air bag non-inflation conditions ...............................2-68
Air bag warning labels...............................................2-72
Curtain air bags..........................................................2-58
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger seat ...........................................2-64
Driver's air bag...........................................................2-54
Driver's knee air bag..................................................2-54
How does the air bags system operate?.....................2-59
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch .................2-55
Passenger's front air bag ............................................2-54
Side air bags...............................................................2-57
SRS Care....................................................................2-70
SRS components and functions .................................2-59
SRS warning light......................................................2-60
What to expect after an air bag inflates.....................2-63
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ..............2-65
Air cleaner ....................................................................7-30
Air conditioner compressor label ...................................8-9
Air Conditioning refrigerant label..............................3-124
Air conditioning system specification............................8-5
Air ventilation seats......................................................2-21
Airconditioning system...............................................3-112
Alarm system................................................................3-17
Antenna...........................................................................4-2
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .....................................5-29
Appearance care ...........................................................7-83
Exterior care...............................................................7-83
Interior care................................................................7-88
Armrest .........................................................................2-16
Ashtray........................................................................3-132
Audio / Video / Navigation system ................................4-4
Auto defogging system...............................................3-128
Auto light......................................................................3-91
Automatic climate control system ..............................3-112
Air conditioning.......................................................3-121
Air Conditioning refrigerant label ...........................3-124
Air intake control .....................................................3-119
Automatic heating and air conditioning ..................3-113
Driver only...............................................................3-120
Fan speed control.....................................................3-120
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-114
Mode selection.........................................................3-116
OFF mode ................................................................3-121
SYNC button............................................................3-118
System maintenance ................................................3-124
Temperature control .................................................3-117
Temperature unit conversion ...................................3-118
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) system..........5-47
Aux, USB and iPod ........................................................4-2
Index
A
I-3
Battery (12 volt) ...........................................................7-37
Battery recharging......................................................7-39
Battery cooling duct .....................................................2-24
Battery saver function...................................................3-95
Before driving.................................................................5-4
Blind spot detection (BSD) system ..............................5-38
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free..................4-4
Bottle holder ...............................................................3-132
Brake fluid ....................................................................7-28
Brake system.................................................................5-25
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..................................5-29
Disc brakes wear indicator ........................................5-26
Electronic stability control (ESC) .............................5-31
Emergency stop signal (ESS) ....................................5-36
Good braking practices..............................................5-37
Hill-start assist control (HAC)...................................5-36
Parking brake .............................................................5-26
Power brakes..............................................................5-25
Vehicle stability management (VSM) .......................5-34
Bulb replacement..........................................................7-66
Daytime running lamp ...............................................7-75
Front position lamp....................................................7-67
Front turn signal lamp ...............................................7-67
Headlamp ...................................................................7-67
Headlamp aiming.......................................................7-71
High mounted stop lamp ...........................................7-81
Interior light bulb.......................................................7-81
License plate light bulb .............................................7-81
Rear combination light bulb ......................................7-76
Rear fog lamp ............................................................7-81
Side repeater lamp ....................................................7-75
Bulb wattage ...................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button................5-9
Camera (Rear view)....................................................3-104
Capacities (Lubricants)...................................................3-6
Care
Exterior care...............................................................7-83
Interior care................................................................7-88
Tire care .....................................................................7-41
Cellular phone holder .................................................3-135
Center console storage................................................3-130
Central door lock switch...............................................3-14
Certification label ...........................................................8-8
Chains
Tire chains..................................................................5-96
Checking tire inflation pressure ...................................7-43
Child restraint system (CRS)........................................2-38
Booster seats ..............................................................2-40
Children always in the rear........................................2-38
Forward-facing child restraint system .......................2-40
Installing a child restraint system (CRS)...................2-41
I
Index
B
C
I-4
ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage
for children ..............................................................2-42
Rearward-facing child restraint system .....................2-39
Securing a child restraint system seat with
"Top-tether Anchorage" system...............................3-44
Securing a child restraint system with
a lap/shoulder belt....................................................3-46
Securing a child restraint system with
the "ISOFIX Anchorage System"............................2-43
Child-protector rear door lock ...................................3-16
Cigarette lighter ..........................................................3-137
Clean air......................................................................3-129
Climate control air filter ...............................................7-32
Clock...........................................................................3-137
Clothes hanger ............................................................3-138
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ..............3-42
Compact spare tire replacement ...................................7-46
Coolant..........................................................................7-24
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant/inverter coolant ......7-24
Crankcase emission control system..............................7-90
Cruise control system ...................................................5-69
Cup holder ..................................................................3-132
Curtain air bags.............................................................2-58
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination.................................................................3-43
Dashboard, see instrument cluster................................3-42
Day/night rearview mirror............................................3-23
Daytime running light (DRL).......................................3-95
Defogging (Windshield) .............................................3-116
Defroster .....................................................................3-111
Rear window defroster.............................................3-111
Defrosting (Windshield) .............................................3-116
Dimensions .....................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination.................................................................3-43
Displays, see instrument cluster ...................................3-42
Distance to empty (for cluster type B) .........................3-48
Door locks.....................................................................3-12
Auto door lock/unlock features .................................3-16
Central door lock switch............................................3-14
Child-protector rear door lock ...................................3-16
Drinks holders, see cup holders..................................3-132
Driver position memory system ...................................3-18
Recalling memory positions ......................................3-19
Storing memory positions..........................................3-18
Driver's air bag .............................................................2-54
Driver's knee air bag.....................................................2-54
Driving at night.............................................................5-93
Driving in flooded areas ...............................................5-94
Driving in the rain ........................................................5-93
Dual clutch transmission ..............................................5-15
Good driving practices...............................................5-23
Manual shift mode .....................................................5-21
Shift lock system .......................................................5-22
Dual clutch transmission shift indicator.......................3-49
Index
D
I-5
Easy access function.....................................................3-19
ECO mode ....................................................................5-20
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)....................................3-23
Electric power steering (EPS) ......................................3-20
Electronic stability control (ESC) ................................5-31
Emergency commodity.................................................6-36
Emergency stop signal (ESS) .......................................5-36
Emergency towing........................................................6-34
Emission control system...............................................7-90
Crankcase emission control system...........................7-90
Evaporative emission control System .......................7-90
Exhaust emission control system...............................7-91
Engine compartment ...............................................1-8, 7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement...............7-54
Engine coolant ..............................................................7-24
Engine coolant temperature guage ...............................3-46
Engine number................................................................8-9
Engine oil......................................................................7-22
Engine specification .......................................................8-2
Engine Start/Stop button.................................................5-9
Evaporative emission control System ..........................7-90
Exhaust emission control system .................................7-91
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............7-20
Exterior care .................................................................7-83
Exterior overview
Front view....................................................................1-2
Rear view .....................................................................1-3
Flat tire
Changing tires............................................................6-17
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack .....................6-23
Jack and tools.............................................................6-16
Jack label ...................................................................6-22
Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)...........................................6-24
Use of compact spare tires.........................................6-20
Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................3-138
Fluid
Brake fluid .................................................................7-28
Washer fluid...............................................................7-29
Front seat adjustment......................................................2-7
Forward and rearward adjustment .............................2-18
Manual adjustment.......................................................2-8
Power adjustment.......................................................2-10
Removal/Reinstall......................................................2-18
Seatback pocket .........................................................2-13
Fuel filler door..............................................................3-39
Fuel gauge.....................................................................3-45
Fuel requirements ...........................................................F-6
Fuse switch ...................................................................7-54
Fuses .............................................................................7-52
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement............7-54
Fuse switch ................................................................7-54
Fuse/relay panel description ......................................7-56
Instrument panel fuse replacement............................7-53
Main fuse ...................................................................7-55
Multi fuse...................................................................7-55
I
Index
E F
I-6
Gauges and meters........................................................3-44
Glove box ...................................................................3-130
Gross vehicle weight ......................................................8-5
Hazard warning flasher...................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-92
Headlamp delay function..............................................3-95
Headlamp leveling device ............................................3-96
Headlamp position........................................................3-92
Headlight bulb replacement..........................................7-67
Headrest ........................................................................2-16
Front seat headrests ...................................................2-17
Rear seat headrests.....................................................2-20
Heated steering wheel...................................................3-21
Heater..........................................................................3-112
Height adjustment.........................................................2-30
High beam operation ....................................................3-92
Highway driving ...........................................................5-94
Hill-start assist control (HAC) .....................................5-36
Hood .............................................................................3-36
Horn ..............................................................................3-22
How to use this manual..................................................F-5
Hybrid battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge...............3-46
Hybrid starter & generator (HSG) belt.........................7-28
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly ......6-4
If the engine overheats ...................................................6-8
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ................6-2
If the engine stalls while driving....................................6-2
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start.........6-4
If the engine will not start ..............................................6-4
If you have a flat tire ....................................................6-16
If you have a flat tire while driving ...............................6-3
Ignition switch ................................................................5-5
Engine Start/Stop button..............................................5-9
Key ignition switch......................................................5-6
Immobilizer system ......................................................3-11
Impact sensing door unlock..........................................3-16
Important safety precautions ..........................................2-2
Air bag hazards............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt..........................................2-2
Control your speed.......................................................2-3
Driver distraction .........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-3
Restrain all children .............................................2-2, 6-2
Indicator light ...............................................................3-50
Inside rearview mirror ..................................................3-22
Instrument cluster .........................................................3-42
Instrument panel illumination....................................3-43
Dual clutch transmission shift indicator....................3-49
Gauges and meters.....................................................3-44
Index
G
H
I
I-7
LCD display control ..................................................3-71
LCD display messages...............................................3-62
LCD modes..........................................................3-72, 79
Trip computer ............................................................3-86
User settings mode ..............................................3-76, 82
Warning and indicator lights......................................3-50
Instrument panel fuse replacement...............................7-53
Instrument panel overview .............................................1-6
Interior care...................................................................7-88
Interior features
Ashtray.....................................................................3-132
Bottle holder ............................................................3-132
Cellular phone holder ..............................................3-135
Cigarette lighter .......................................................3-137
Clock........................................................................3-137
Clothes hanger .........................................................3-138
Cup holder ...............................................................3-132
Floor mat anchor(s) .................................................3-138
Luggage net (holder) ...............................................3-139
Power outlet .............................................................3-133
Sunvisor ...................................................................3-133
USB charger.............................................................3-135
Wireless cellular phone charging system ................3-135
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...............................................3-98
Interior lights ................................................................3-98
Front lamps ................................................................3-98
Front vanity mirror lamp .........................................3-100
Interior lamp AUTO cut ............................................3-98
Puddle lamp .............................................................3-100
Rear lamps .................................................................3-99
Tailgate room lamp....................................................3-99
Interior overview ............................................................1-4
Inverter coolant.............................................................7-24
Jack and tools ...............................................................6-16
Jump starting...................................................................6-4
Label
Air conditioner compressor label ................................8-9
Tire sidewall labeling.................................................7-47
Tire specification and pressure label ...........................8-9
Vehicle certification label ............................................8-8
Lane keeping assist system (LKAS) ............................5-59
Lap/shoulder belt ..........................................................2-29
LCD display..................................................................3-71
Assist mode................................................................3-81
LCD modes..........................................................3-72, 79
Trip computer mode ............................................3-73, 80
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode..................................3-73, 81
User settings mode ..............................................3-76, 82
LCD display control .....................................................3-71
LCD display messages .................................................3-62
LCD modes.............................................................3-72, 79
I
Index
J
L
I-8
Light bulbs....................................................................7-66
Lighting.........................................................................3-89
Auto light ...................................................................3-91
Battery saver function................................................3-95
Daytime running light (DRL)....................................3-95
Headlamp delay function...........................................3-95
Headlamp leveling device .........................................3-96
Headlamp position .....................................................3-92
High beam operation .................................................3-92
Position lamp position ...............................................3-92
Rear fog lamp ............................................................3-94
Rear fog lamp ............................................................3-94
Traffic change ..........................................................3-124
Turn signals................................................................3-93
Turn signals................................................................3-93
Lubricants and capacities ...............................................8-6
Luggage net (holder) ..................................................3-139
Luggage volume .............................................................8-5
Main fuse ......................................................................7-55
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items............7-20
Maintenance services...................................................7-4
Maintenance under severe usage conditions .......7-12, 18
Normal maintenance service .................................7-8, 14
Owner maintenance .....................................................7-5
Scheduled maintenance services .................................7-7
Tire maintenance........................................................7-47
Maintenance services......................................................7-4
Manual shift mode........................................................5-21
Mirrors ..........................................................................3-22
Adjusting the outside rearview mirrors .....................3-25
Day/night rearview mirror .........................................3-23
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) .................................3-23
Folding/Unfolding the outside rearview mirror ........3-26
Inside rearview mirror ...............................................3-22
Outside rearview mirror.............................................3-24
Moonroof, see sunroof..................................................3-33
Multi box ....................................................................3-131
Multi fuse......................................................................7-55
Multimedia system .........................................................4-2
Antenna........................................................................4-2
Audio / Video / Navigation system .............................4-4
Aux, USB and iPod .....................................................4-2
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free ...............4-4
Steering wheel audio control .......................................4-3
Odometer ......................................................................3-48
Oil (Engine) ..................................................................7-22
Outside rearview mirror ...............................................3-24
Outside temperature gauge ...........................................3-47
Owner maintenance ........................................................7-5
Index
M
O
I-9
Parking assist system..................................................3-108
Parking brake................................................................5-26
Parking brake................................................................7-30
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch ....................2-55
Passenger's front air bag...............................................2-54
Position lamp position ..................................................3-92
Power brakes.................................................................5-25
Power gauge .................................................................3-45
Power outlet................................................................3-133
Power steering ..............................................................3-20
Power window lock button...........................................3-31
Pre-tensioner seat belt...................................................2-31
Puddle lamp ................................................................3-100
Rear center seatbelt.......................................................2-31
Rear fog lamp ...............................................................3-94
Rear fog lamp ...............................................................3-94
Rear parking assist system .........................................3-105
Rear seat adjustment.....................................................2-13
Armrest ......................................................................2-16
Folding the rear seat ..................................................2-13
Rear seat headrests .......................................................2-20
Adjusting the height up and down.............................2-20
Rear seat warmers.........................................................2-24
Rear view camera .......................................................3-104
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures .................7-42
Recommended lubricants and capacities........................8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number ........................8-7
Remote key .....................................................................3-4
Battery replacement .....................................................3-6
Mechanical key............................................................3-5
Removable towing hook...............................................6-33
Replacement light bulb.................................................7-66
Returning used vehicles ................................................F-9
Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-92
Rotation (Tire) ..............................................................7-44
Safety messages..............................................................F-5
Scheduled maintenance services ....................................7-7
Seat belt warning light..................................................2-24
Seat belts.......................................................................2-25
Additional seat belt safety precautions......................2-34
Care of seat belts .......................................................2-36
Do not lie down .........................................................2-36
Height adjustment......................................................2-30
Keep belts clean and dry............................................2-36
Lap/shoulder belt .......................................................2-29
One person per belt....................................................2-36
Periodic inspection.....................................................2-36
Pre-tensioner seat belt................................................2-31
I
Index
P
R
S
I-10
Rear center seatbelt....................................................2-31
Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-29
Seat belt safety precautions .......................................2-25
Seat belt use and children..........................................2-34
Seat belt use and injured people ................................2-36
Seat belt use during pregnancy..................................2-34
Seat belt warning light...............................................2-26
When to replace seat belts .........................................2-37
Seat warmers
Front ..........................................................................2-21
Rear............................................................................2-24
Seats................................................................................2-4
Air ventilation seats ...................................................2-21
Battery cooling duct...................................................2-24
Front seat adjustment...................................................2-7
Front seat warmers.....................................................2-21
Headrest .....................................................................2-16
Rear seat adjustment..................................................2-13
Rear seat warmers......................................................2-24
Safety precautions........................................................2-6
Shift lock system ..........................................................5-22
Side air bags .................................................................2-57
Smart cruise control system .........................................5-75
Smart key........................................................................3-7
Battery replacement ...................................................3-10
Mechanical key............................................................3-9
Smooth cornering .........................................................5-93
Snow tires .....................................................................5-95
Spare tire
Compact spare tire replacement ................................7-46
Special driving conditions
Driving at night..........................................................5-93
Driving in flooded areas ............................................5-94
Driving in the rain .....................................................5-93
Hazardous driving conditions....................................5-92
Highway driving ........................................................5-94
Rocking the vehicle ...................................................5-92
Smooth cornering.......................................................5-93
Speed limit control system ...........................................5-67
Speed sensing door lock ...............................................3-16
Speedometer .................................................................3-44
SPORT mode ................................................................5-20
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start.................6-4
Steering wheel ..............................................................3-20
Electric power steering (EPS) ...................................3-20
Heated steering wheel................................................3-21
Horn ...........................................................................3-22
Power steering ...........................................................3-20
Tilt steering / Telescope steering ...............................3-21
Steering wheel audio control..........................................4-3
Storage compartment..................................................3-130
Center console storage.............................................3-134
Glove box.................................................................3-130
Multi box .................................................................3-131
Sunglass holder........................................................3-131
Sunglass holder...........................................................3-131
Index
I-11
Sunroof .........................................................................3-33
Automatic reversal.....................................................3-34
Resetting the sunroof .................................................3-35
Sliding the sunroof.....................................................3-33
Sunroof opening and closing .....................................3-33
Sunshade ....................................................................3-35
Tilting the sunroof .....................................................3-34
Sunroof inside air recirculation ..................................3-129
Sunvisor ......................................................................3-133
Tachometer ...................................................................3-44
Tailgate .........................................................................3-38
Tailgate room lamp.......................................................3-99
Theft-alarm system .......................................................3-17
Tilt steering / Telescope steering ..................................3-21
Tire chains ....................................................................5-96
Tire load and speed capacity ..........................................8-5
Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)..............................................6-24
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....................6-10
Tire rotation ..................................................................7-44
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-9
Tires and wheels ...........................................................7-41
Checking tire inflation pressure.................................7-43
Compact spare tire replacement ................................7-46
Low aspect ratio tires.................................................7-51
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..............7-42
Tire care .....................................................................7-41
Tire maintenance........................................................7-47
Tire replacement ........................................................7-45
Tire rotation ...............................................................7-44
Tire sidewall labeling.................................................7-47
Tire traction................................................................7-46
Wheel alignment and tire balance .............................7-45
Wheel replacement.............................................7-46, 8-4
Towing ..........................................................................6-32
Traffic change .............................................................3-124
Trip computer ...............................................................3-86
Average fuel economy ...............................................3-87
Average vehicle speed ...............................................3-88
Digital speedometer ...................................................3-89
Distance to empty (for cluster type A) ......................3-87
Driving Info display...................................................3-89
Driving style ..............................................................3-90
Elapsed time...............................................................3-88
Energy flow................................................................3-90
Engine coolant temperature .......................................3-90
Instant fuel economy .................................................3-87
Tripmeter....................................................................3-88
Turn signals ..................................................................3-93
I
Index
T
I-12
USB charger ...............................................................3-135
User settings mode .................................................3-76, 82
Vanity mirror lamp .....................................................3-100
Vehicle break-in process.................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label ...............................................8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN)..............................8-8
Vehicle modification.......................................................F-9
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ..........................5-34
Vehicle weight ............................................................5-100
Overloading .............................................................5-100
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-50
Warning light ................................................................3-50
Washer fluid..................................................................7-29
Welcome system ...........................................................3-97
Door handle lamp ......................................................3-97
Headlamp and parking lamp .....................................3-97
Interior lamp ..............................................................3-97
Puddle lamp ..............................................................3-97
Wheel alignment and tire balance ................................7-45
Wheel replacement .......................................................7-46
Windows .......................................................................3-27
Power window lock switch........................................3-31
Windshield defrosting and defogging.........................3-116
Windshield washers ...................................................3-102
Windshield wipers .....................................................3-103
Winter driving...............................................................5-95
Snow tires ..................................................................5-95
Tire chains..................................................................5-96
Wiper blade replacement ..............................................7-34
Wipers and washers ....................................................3-101
Windshield washers ................................................3-103
Windshield wipers ..................................................3-101
Wireless cellular phone charging system ...................3-135
Index
U
W
V
